Absence Management Rel 9.1 - Volumn 1

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibited Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates
e
ens
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
noManagement
Absence
a
e
s
d
a
i
h 9.1Gu
Rel
)
a
c dent
o
i
r
nta is StuVolume I - Student Guide
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
(s
e
H
D68368GC11
1.1
April 2011
D72937
to
Copyright 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
This document contains proprietary information and is protected by copyright and other intellectual property laws. You may copy and
print this document solely for your own use in an Oracle training course. The document may not be modified or altered in any way.
Except where your use constitutes "fair use" under copyright law, you may not use, share, download, upload, copy, print, display,
perform, reproduce, publish, license, post, transmit, or distribute this document in whole or in part without the express authorization of
Oracle.
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice. If you find any problems in the document, please report
them in writing to: Oracle University, 500 Oracle Parkway, Redwood Shores, California 94065 USA. This document is not warranted to
be error-free.
If this documentation is delivered to the United States Government or anyone using the documentation on behalf of the United States
Government, the following notice is applicable:
U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS
The U.S. Government's rights to use, modify, reproduce, release, perform, display, or disclose these training materials are restricted by
the terms of the applicable Oracle license agreement and/or the applicable U.S. Government contract.
Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation and/or its affiliates. Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners.
e
ens
ra
li
e
l
b
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
(s
e
H
to
Contents
Volume I
Lesson 1
Course Overview ............................................................................................................................................. 1
Agenda ............................................................................................................................................................... 2
Lesson 2
Business Process Overview ............................................................................................................................. 7
Describing Absence Management Features ...................................................................................................... 8
Describing Integration with Other Applications ............................................................................................... 9
Describing Absence Terminology ................................................................................................................... 11
Describing Elements ........................................................................................................................................ 13
Describing the Organizational, Processing, and Calendar Frameworks ......................................................... 15
Describing Setup and Processing Steps ........................................................................................................... 20
Describing Sources of Information About Absence Management .................................................................. 23
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
Lesson 3
rio tude
a
t
Creating Schedules ........................................................................................................................................
27
n is S
o
Describing the Use of Schedules
28
@ .....................................................................................................................
h
t
e
h
e
Explaining Schedule
30
s
hGroups u...........................................................................................................................
a
r
Creating Work
sa Schedules ................................................................................................................................ 32
(
e
Validating Schedule Changes .......................................................................................................................... 40
hH
ra Describing Holiday Schedules ........................................................................................................................ 41
Sa
Explaining Methods of Assigning Work Schedules ........................................................................................ 43

Activity 1: Creating and Viewing a Work Schedule ...................................................................................... 46
Lesson 4
Defining Common Characteristics of Elements ......................................................................................... 51
Explaining Elements Categories ..................................................................................................................... 52
Defining Basic Element Parameters ................................................................................................................ 54
Lesson 5
Defining Absence Entitlement Elements .....................................................................................................
Describing Entitlement Accrual ......................................................................................................................
Creating Absence Entitlement Elements .........................................................................................................
Modifying Entitlement Balance Accumulators ...............................................................................................
Activity 2: Creating a Frequency-based Entitlement Element ........................................................................
75
76
77
90
94
iii
Contents
Lesson 6
Defining Absence Take Elements ................................................................................................................ 99
Explaining Absence Types and Reasons ....................................................................................................... 100
Describing Absence Take Elements .............................................................................................................. 102
Creating Absence Take Elements .................................................................................................................. 103
Describing Absence Setup Guidelines ......................................................................................................... 117
Activity 3: Creating an Absence Take Element ............................................................................................ 119
Lesson 7
Setting Up Supporting Elements ................................................................................................................ 123
Describing System Elements ......................................................................................................................... 125
Creating Variable Elements ........................................................................................................................... 129
Describing Date Elements ............................................................................................................................. 132
Defining Duration Elements .......................................................................................................................... 135
Activity 4: Creating a Duration Element to Determine Years of Service ..................................................... 141
Creating Formula Elements ........................................................................................................................... 145
Describing Operators Used in Formulas ....................................................................................................... 153
Activity 5: Defining a Formula ..................................................................................................................... 157
Explaining Elements Used to Look Up Values ............................................................................................. 162
Creating Brackets .......................................................................................................................................... 165
Activity 6: Using a Bracket to Determine Entitlement ................................................................................. 173
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
(s
e
H
Lesson 8
Defining the Organizational Framework .................................................................................................. 183
Describing the Organizational Framework ................................................................................................... 184
Defining Element Groups .............................................................................................................................. 186
Defining Eligibility Groups ........................................................................................................................... 188
Defining Pay Entities ..................................................................................................................................... 189
Defining Pay Groups ..................................................................................................................................... 192
Mapping Pay Groups ..................................................................................................................................... 196
Activity 7: Creating an Organizational Framework ..................................................................................... 198
Lesson 9
Defining the Processing Framework .......................................................................................................... 209
Describing the Processing Framework .......................................................................................................... 210
Defining Sections .......................................................................................................................................... 212
Defining Process Lists ................................................................................................................................... 217
Activity 8: Defining a Processing Framework ............................................................................................. 221
iv
Contents
Lesson 10
Setting Up Calendars .................................................................................................................................. 227
Describing Calendar Concepts ...................................................................................................................... 228
Defining Run Types ...................................................................................................................................... 230
Defining Periods ............................................................................................................................................ 232
Defining Calendars ........................................................................................................................................ 235
Defining Calendar Groups ............................................................................................................................. 241
Activity 9: Setting Up Calendars ................................................................................................................... 246
Lesson 11
Managing Payee Data ................................................................................................................................. 255
Explaining Integration with PeopleSoft Enterprise Human Resources ......................................................... 256
Viewing Payee Data ..................................................................................................................................... 260
Activity 10: Updating Payee Information ..................................................................................................... 261
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
Lesson 12
no
a
s uide
Entering and Processing Absences ............................................................................................................
267
a
h
)
Entering Absence Events ...............................................................................................................................
268
a nt G
c
e
o
Activity 11: Entering an Absence Event
273
d
ri.......................................................................................................
u
a
t
t
n
Explaining Entitlement and Take
o Processing
s S................................................................................................ 276
i
@
h
Running the Absence Process
.......................................................................................................................
279
t
e se
h
Describing the rProcessing

u and Options ............................................................................................. 287
ah Phases
a
s
Viewing (Processing
Results .......................................................................................................................... 297
e
H 12: Processing Absences and Reviewing Results ........................................................................... 299
Activity
h
a
r
Sa
Lesson 13
Viewing Absence Processing Results .........................................................................................................
Identifying the Result Tables ........................................................................................................................
Explaining the Payee Process Stat and Payee Segment Stat Records ...........................................................
Viewing Online Pages with Processing Results ............................................................................................
Activity 13: Viewing Processing Results ......................................................................................................
311
312
315
318
323
Lesson 14
Controlling Processing Results ................................................................................................................... 329
Defining Rounding Rules .............................................................................................................................. 330
Describing Frequency Conversion ................................................................................................................ 333
Explaining Generation Control ..................................................................................................................... 338
Activity 14: Managing Entitlement Resolution With Generation Control .................................................... 349
Contents
Lesson 15
Overriding Supporting Elements ...............................................................................................................
Listing the Types of Supporting Elements that You Can Override ..............................................................
Explaining Where to Create Supporting Element Overrides ........................................................................
Explaining the Element Override Hierarchy .................................................................................................
357
358
359
367
Lesson 16
Adjusting Frequency-Based Entitlement ..................................................................................................
Describing Methods for Adjusting Frequency-Based Entitlement ...............................................................
Adjusting a Payee's Frequency-Based Entitlement Balance .........................................................................
Overriding the Definition of a Frequency-Based Entitlement ......................................................................
Activity 15: Adjusting Frequency-Based Entitlement ..................................................................................
371
372
373
374
375
e
ens
li
e
l
b
to
ra
fe
s
n
a
Lesson 17
Generating Positive Input for Payroll ....................................................................................................... 391
Describing Positive Input Generation ........................................................................................................... 392
Creating Earning and Deduction Elements ................................................................................................... 395
Mapping Earnings and Deductions to a Payroll System ............................................................................... 405
Associating Earning and Deduction Elements with Take Elements ............................................................. 410
Activity 16: Generating Positive Input .......................................................................................................... 413
Volume II
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
(s
e
H
Lesson 18
Defining Absence-Based Entitlements and Takes .................................................................................... 425
Defining Absence-Based Entitlement Elements ........................................................................................... 426
Defining Take Elements with Absence-Based Entitlement .......................................................................... 427
Activity 17: Processing Absence-Based Entitlements and Takes ................................................................. 430
Describing How to Link Related Absences .................................................................................................. 449
Adjusting Absence-Based Entitlement .......................................................................................................... 451
Lesson 19
Defining Extended Absences ......................................................................................................................
Describing Extended Absences .....................................................................................................................
Setting up Configurable Sections ..................................................................................................................
Adding Attachments ......................................................................................................................................
Setting up Extended Absences ......................................................................................................................
Managing extended absences ........................................................................................................................
Activity 18: Creating an Extended Absence .................................................................................................
vi
455
456
457
469
476
482
491
Contents
Lesson 20
Implementing Absence Take Features ...................................................................................................... 497
Defining Qualifying Periods for Using Entitlement ...................................................................................... 498
Defining Rules for Negative Entitlement Balances ...................................................................................... 501
Activity 19: Implementing Period and Negative Balance Rules ................................................................... 505
Using Mapping to Generate Absence Data for Two Take Elements ............................................................ 520
Explaining How to Store Data in User Defined Fields ................................................................................. 522
Activity 20: Mapping Take Elements ........................................................................................................... 525
Activity 21: Redirecting Take Elements ....................................................................................................... 536
to
e
s
551
en
Lesson 21
Defining Forecasting and Balance Inquiry Processes ..............................................................................
Explaining Forecasting and Balance Inquiry ...............................................................................................
Setting Up Forecasting and Balance Inquiry Processing ..............................................................................
Forecasting an Absence Event ......................................................................................................................
Viewing Absence Balances ...........................................................................................................................
Activity 22: Setting up Forecasting ...............................................................................................................
Activity 23: Forecasting Entitlement ............................................................................................................
ra
li
e
l
b
fe
s
n
a
552
553
563
567
569
578
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
Lesson 22
o
@ th
Using Leave Donationse................................................................................................................................
591
h
e
s
h Programs
Describing Leave
u ............................................................................................................ 592
aTransfer
r
a
s Transfer Entitlements .......................................................................................................... 593
Defining (Leave
e
H up Leave Donation Framework ......................................................................................................... 596
Setting
h
a
r Initiating Leave Transfer Requests ................................................................................................................ 601
Sa
Lesson 23
Managing Iterative Processing ................................................................................................................... 617
Describing Trigger Types .............................................................................................................................. 618
Describing Iterative Triggers ......................................................................................................................... 619
Setting Up Trigger Definitions ...................................................................................................................... 620
Viewing Iterative Triggers ............................................................................................................................ 624
Explaining Mass Triggers ............................................................................................................................. 627
Lesson 24
Implementing Segmentation ...................................................................................................................... 635
Defining Segmentation Terminology ............................................................................................................ 636
Explaining Types of Segmentation ............................................................................................................... 639
Setting Up Segmentation ............................................................................................................................... 642
vii
Contents
Viewing, Adding, and Canceling Segmentation Triggers ............................................................................. 648

Describing General Rules for Segmentation Processing ............................................................................... 649
Explaining Proration ...................................................................................................................................... 653
Activity 24: Segmenting Entitlement ............................................................................................................ 659
Lesson 25
Sending Absence Data to Payroll .............................................................................................................. 671
Explaining the Transmission of Absence Data to Payroll ............................................................................ 672
Describing Transmitted Data ......................................................................................................................... 674
Sending Absence Data to Payroll .................................................................................................................. 675
Explaining Payroll Processing with Absence Data ....................................................................................... 681
Explaining the Impact of Retroactivity ......................................................................................................... 685
Activity 25: Sending Absence Data to Payroll .............................................................................................. 686
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
Lesson 26
Processing Retroactivity ............................................................................................................................. 691
Explaining Retroactivity ................................................................................................................................ 692
Defining Retroactivity Terminology ............................................................................................................. 693
Defining Rules for Retroactive Processing ................................................................................................... 696
Enabling Retro Processing by Run Type, Calendar, and Calendar Group .................................................... 708
Viewing, Adding, and Canceling Retro Triggers .......................................................................................... 709
Activity 26: Processing Retroactive Absence Activity ................................................................................. 711
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
723
724
727
735
737
Lesson 28
Course Review .............................................................................................................................................
Explaining the Purpose of Elements .............................................................................................................
Creating Organizational, Processing, and Calendar Frameworks .................................................................
Building Rules for Tracking Absences and Accrued Time Off ....................................................................
Creating and Assigning Work Schedules ......................................................................................................
Entering Absences and Forecasting Entitlement ...........................................................................................
Processing Absences and Viewing the Results .............................................................................................
Adjusting Entitlement Balances ....................................................................................................................
Sending Absence Data to Your Payroll System ............................................................................................
749
751
753
756
758
759
761
766
767
h
ara
viii
(s
e
H
Lesson 27
Processing Off-Cycle Transactions ............................................................................................................
Explaining Off-Cycle Processing ..................................................................................................................
Entering Instructions for Off-Cycle Processing ............................................................................................
Processing Off-Cycle Transactions ..............................................................................................................
Activity 27: Making an Off-Cycle Correction ..............................................................................................
Contents
Appendix A
Defining Self-Service Absence Transactions ............................................................................................. 771
Objectives ...................................................................................................................................................... 771
Describing Setup Steps for Self-Service Absence Tasks .............................................................................. 771
Explaining Self-Service Absence Tasks for Employees ............................................................................... 792
Explaining Self-Service Tasks for Managers ................................................................................................ 804
Appendix B
Working with Approvals and Delegation .................................................................................................. 809
Objectives ...................................................................................................................................................... 809
Describing Approval Processing ................................................................................................................... 809
Explaining Setup Tasks for Approvals .......................................................................................................... 812
Describing Approval Process Definition Setup ............................................................................................. 813
Enabling Approval Processing for Absence Takes ....................................................................................... 821
Describing AWE Administrator Actions for Approvals ............................................................................... 823
Describing Delegation ................................................................................................................................... 823
Explaining Delivered Absence Management Delegation Setup ................................................................... 826
Describing Administrator Actions for Delegation ........................................................................................ 831
Describing Self-Service Delegation .............................................................................................................. 833
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
(s
e
H
ix
ra
Sa
fe
s
n
a
ra
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
h
(s
e
H
li
e
l
b
e
ens
to
Lesson 1
Course Overview
Note. The appearance of the page shots in the guide may not always match the training environment. This is
due to updates that have been applied to the training environment after the course guide was released. The
functionality of the software has not changed.
Objectives
to
By the end of this course, you will be able to:

Create organizational, processing, and calendar frameworks.
e
ens
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
Create and assign work schedules.
s uide
a
h
Enter absences and forecast entitlement. ca)
tG
n
e
o
ari Stud
Process absences and view the n
results.
t
o his
@
t
Adjust entitlement balances.
e
h
e
s
u system.
adatah to your payroll
r
Send absence
a
(s
e
hH
Build rules for tracking absences and accrued time off.
ra
Slide 3
Sa
Course Overview
Lesson 1
Agenda
Day One
On day one, we will provide an overview of PeopleSoft Enterprise Absence Management and discuss these
topics:
Business process overview.
Creating schedules.
Defining common characteristics of elements.
Defining absence entitlement elements.
Defining absence take elements.
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
Slide 4
(s
e
H
e
ens
to
Lesson 1
Course Overview
Agenda (continued)
Day Two
On day two, we will discuss these topics:
Setting up supporting elements.
Defining the organizational framework.
Defining the processing framework.
Setting up calendars.
Slide 5
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
(s
e
H
Course Overview
Lesson 1
Agenda (continued)
Day Three
On day three, we will discuss these topics:
Managing payee data.
Entering and processing absences.
Viewing absence processing results.
Controlling processing results.
Overriding supporting elements.
Slide 6
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
(s
e
H
e
ens
to
Lesson 1
Course Overview
Agenda (continued)
Day Four
On day four, we will discuss these topics:
Adjusting frequency-based entitlement.
Generating positive input for payroll.
Defining absence-based entitlements and takes.
Defining extended absences
Implementing absence take features.
e
ens
to
Defining forecasting and balance inquiry processes.
ra
fe
s
n
a
Using Leave Donations
li
e
l
b
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
Slide 7
ra
Sa
(s
e
H
Course Overview
Lesson 1
Agenda (continued)
Day Five
On day five, we will discuss these topics:
Managing iterative processing.
Implementing segmentation.
Sending absence data to payroll.
Processing retroactivity.
Processing off-cycle transactions.
Course review.
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
(s
e
H
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
Slide 8
e
ens
to
Lesson 2
Business Process Overview

Objectives
By the end of this lesson, you will be able to describe:
Absence Management features.
to
li
e
l
b
Integration with other applications.

Absence terminology.
Elements.
e
ens
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
Organizational, processing, and calendar frameworks.
no
a
s uide
a
Setup and processing steps.
h
a) nt G
c
Sources of information about Absenceio

de
r Management.
u
a
t
t
n is S
o
Slide 10
e@ se th
h
u
ah
r
a
(s
e
H
h
a
r
Sa
Lesson 2
Describing Absence Management Features
Features
Absence Management is a rules-based application that gives you control over absence planning and
compensation. Key features include the ability to:
e
ens
ra
li
e
l
b
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
Slide 11
ra
Sa
(s
e
H
to
Lesson 2
Describing Integration with Other Applications
Integration with Other PeopleSoft Products

This diagram illustrates the integration between Absence Management and other PeopleSoft HRMS
applications.
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
Slide 12
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
Student Notes
(s
e
H
h
ara Management Integration

SAbsence
Absence Management shares the same relational data framework, user interface, reporting tools, and
customization capabilities as PeopleSoft Enterprise Human Resources. This enables Absence Management to
automatically retrieve personal data, job data, and other information from Human Resources for absence
processing.
After you process absence data, you can transmit it to:
PeopleSoft Enterprise Payroll for North America directly, or indirectly through PeopleSoft Enterprise Time
and Labor.
PeopleSoft Enterprise Payroll Interface, if you're using a third-party payroll system.
Your payroll system can then compensate payees for paid absences.
Lesson 2
Integration with Oracle Workforce Scheduling

Oracle Workforce Scheduling (OWS) provides a comprehensive solution to forecasting the demand for labor
and scheduling the right people to the right activities at the right time to meet customer service and cost
objectives. OWS uses employee absence information to forecast the demand for labor and to create optimized
schedules. PeopleSoft Absence Management uses Integration Broker to send asynchronous, one-way
messages to OWS with employee data, absence dates and times.
When PeopleSoft HRMS products and OWS are integrated, the following information is exchanged
asynchronously between the applications:
PeopleSoft Human Resources sends employee personal, job, contract and profile information to OWS.
PeopleSoft Absence Management sends absence data to OWS.
PeopleSoft Time and Labor sends employee schedule preferences, updates to schedule preferences and
approved or submitted reported time to OWS.
e
ens
OWS sends employee optimized punch schedules back to Time and Labor.
ra
li
e
l
b
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
10
(s
e
H
to
Lesson 2
Describing Absence Terminology
Absence Terminology
Terms that are commonly used when referring to absence tracking include:
Absence event
Units
Entitlement
Daily data
Entitlement balance
Positive input
Adjustment
Generated positive input
e
ens
to
Take
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
Student Notes
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
Additional Absence Terms

rio tude
a
t
n is when
S referring to absence processing:
Following are additional termso
that are used
@
h
t
he use
h
ra
a
s
e(
H
rah
a
S
Slide 13
11
Lesson 2
Term
Definition
Absence event
The consecutive period of time that a payee is absent for

the same reason.
Entitlement
The units of paid time off that a payee is entitled to take

for each type of absence or each absence event, depending
on the accrual method.
Entitlement balance
The number of units of unused entitlement.
Adjustment
An increase or decrease made to the entitlement balance.
Take
The number of units of time off that a payee actually

takes.
Units
The period of time in which entitlement, takes, balances,

and other absence-related time periods are measured.
e
ens
ic
l
e
bleach day of an
Daily data
The detailed rows of data created
for
a
r
absence event.
fe
s
n
trasa a balance adjustment.
Positive input
Entered data,nsuch
no
a
e process generates for earning and
sData thatutheidTake
a
h
G elements.
a) ndeduction
t
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
Examples of Absence Terminology
e@ se th
h
u some of the absence terms are used:

Following are examples
ah of how
r
a
(sEvent: If a payee is out sick from Monday to Wednesday, the three-day absence is referred to as
e
Absence
H
an absence event.
h
a
r
Sa Entitlement: Payees may be entitled to receive eight sick days per year.
Units: Units typically represent hours, or days.
12
to
Lesson 2
Describing Elements
Purpose of Elements
In Absence Management, elements are:
The smallest components of the system.
Used to define absence rules and processes.
Reusable throughout the system.
You can put elements together in many different ways to produce an absence system that meets your specific
needs.
to
Slide 14
Student Notes
e
ens
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
How to Use Elements in Absence Management
a
s uide
a
h
The system contains no delivered absence rules (however
does include some system rules that you can use
a) ntit G
c
as system data for any country).
rio tude
a
t
n Theissystem
S stores your rules as data and uses its utility programs to
You use online pages to createo
rules.
@
resolve these rules.
h
t
he use
h
You can combine
raelements to create the business rules that drive the application and the actual absence
a
s
process. (
e
H
rahMost elements resolve to a value.
a
S
13
Lesson 2
Describing Elements (continued)
Defining Absence Rules with Elements

Two types of primary elements define absence rules:
to
You can use supporting elements, such as formulas, counts, dates, and brackets to create absence entitlement
and take elements.
e
ens
li
e
l
b
ra
Slide 15
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
Entitlement Elements and Take Elements
h
)
a
t Gand entitlement elements:
c
n
Here are some brief descriptions and simple

examples
of
take
e
o
ari Stud
t
n
odefine how
Absence entitlement elements
is much paid time off your organization gives payees for various
kinds of absences. he@ e th
s
h
u
a
r
Example: An
(sa entitlement element for vacation might specify that payees receive 20 days of paid vacation
eacheyear.
H
h
a
Absence
take elements define the rules to apply to an absence to determine if it should be paid.
r
Sa
Student Notes
Example: A take element for vacation might require that payees be employed three months before using
vacation entitlement.
14
Lesson 2
Describing the Organizational, Processing, and Calendar

Frameworks
Three Types of Frameworks
To process elements, you must build three types of frameworks:
Organizational framework
Processing framework
Calendar framework
Slide 16
e
ens
to
Student Notes
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
o
n
a
Each type of framework serves a distinct purpose. An organizational

framework
identifies the elements that
e
s
d
a
i
can be processed for a payee as well as the payees to
process; au
processing framework lists the elements to
h
a) nthet G
process and the order in which they are to be
processed;
calendar framework links together the
c
e
o
i
organizational and processing frameworks
and identifies
the periods of time to process.
d
r
nta is Stu
o
e@ se th
h
u
ah
r
a
(s
e
hH
Purpose of the Frameworks
ra
Sa
15
Lesson 2

Frameworks (continued)
Organizational Framework
This diagram displays the organizational framework for Absence Management:
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
Slide 17
(s
e
H
rah
a
SStudent Notes
The Organizational Framework
The organizational framework consists of:
16
Elements
Elements are the basic building blocks of Absence Management and are the
foundation of this application.
Element groups
Element groups are logical groupings of elements. An element can belong to more
than one element group.
Eligibility groups
Eligibility groups are logical groupings of element groups for a group of payees.
An element group can belong to more than one eligibility group.
Payees
A payee is anyone who is processed in Absence Management.
Lesson 2
Pay group
A pay group is a grouping of payees. Usually a payee is in one pay group only,
unless the payee has multiple jobs.
Pay entity
Typically, a pay entity is the organization that is responsible for making payroll
payments to payees. In Absence Management, the pay entity defines various
system defaults.
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
(s
e
H
17
Lesson 2

Processing Framework
This diagram displays the system's processing framework:
e
ens
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
Slide 18
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
Student Notes
e@ se th
h
u
ah
r
a
(s Framework
The Processing
e
H
h
a
The
processing framework is made up of:
r
Sa
Elements
Sections
Sections list a set of elements to be processed and define the processing sequence for those elements.
Process Lists
A process list identifies the sections of elements to be processed and the sequence for processing the
sections.
18
to
Lesson 2

Calendar Framework
The calendar framework ties all of the relevant frameworks together:
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
Slide 19
(s
e
H
rah
a
SStudent Notes
The Calendar Framework
The calendar framework is made up of:
Run types that identify the elements to process through a process list.
Calendar periods that define the period of time to process.
Calendars that identify the run type, calendar period, and payees to process.
Calendar groups that identify the calendars to process at the same time.
19
Lesson 2
Describing Setup and Processing Steps
Setup and Ongoing Tasks

This diagram illustrates the high-level setup steps and ongoing tasks for managing absences.
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
Slide 20
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
(s
e
H
Student
rah Notes
Sa
Overview of Setup Tasks

The key implementation tasks are as follows:
1. Define work schedules and assign to payees.
Work schedules define the hours and days of the week that payees are scheduled to work and tell the
system whether a reported absence occurred during a scheduled work time.
2. Define absence types and reasons.
Absence types and reasons enable you to further classify absences.
3. Define absence entitlement elements.
Absence entitlement elements define how much paid time off your organization gives payees for various
kinds of absences.
20
Lesson 2
4. Define absence take elements.

Absence take elements define your rules for allowing paid time off. They define which kinds of absences
are valid and the requirements that must be met before entitlement can be used.
5. Add absence elements to eligibility groups and process lists.
Element groups are the means by which elements are assigned to payees.
Process lists define which elements are resolved during absence processing and the order in which they
are resolved.
Overview of Ongoing Tasks

Once implementation is complete, you can begin to perform the day-to-day absence management tasks:
1. Enter absences.
e
ens
To record actual absences into the system, users select the take element that identifies the absence and
enter the dates of the absence.
to
li
e
l
b
era
f
s
n entitlement balances.
The Entitlement process resolves the entitlement accrual and updates a
payees'
r
t
on
3. Run the Take process.
n
a de
s
a
i unpaid units for the payroll process.
The Take process applies the absence rules to calculate
h paid
uand
)
G
a
c dent
4. Send processed absence data to payroll.
o
i
r
nta is Stu
o
e@ se th
h
u
ah
r
a
(s
e
hH
2. Run the Entitlement process.
ra
Sa
21
Lesson 2
Describing Setup and Processing Steps (continued)
Processing Steps
This diagram shows the processing cycle for entitlements and takes.
e
ens
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
Student Notes
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
Batch Processing
rio tude
a
t
nprocessing
o
Absence Management uses batch
s Sto resolve entitlements and takes and to generate input for
i
@
h
t
payroll processing. he
e
s
h
u
a
ar
s
(
e
H
rah
a
S
Slide 21
22
to
Lesson 2
Describing Sources of Information About Absence Management
Implementation and Business Process Information

Use the PeopleSoft Enterprise Absence Management 9.1 PeopleBook to find implementation and business
process information for Absence Management, including:
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
o
n
a
Student Notes
e
s
d
a
i
h Gu
)
a
c dent
o
i
Additional Information
r
nta isinformation
Stu in the PeopleSoft Enterprise 9.1 Absence Management
o
This table lists the locations
of
additional
e@ se th
PeopleBook:
h
u
ah
r
a
(s
e
H
h
a
r
Sa
Slide 22
23
Lesson 2
Location
Type of Information
Getting started chapter
This chapter provides general implementation information and references to additional

sources of pertinent information, including:
Absence Management business processes.
Absence Management integrations.

Implementing Absence Management.
Implementation chapters
These chapters discuss implementation concepts and tasks:
Defining General Element Information

Defining Data Retrieval Elements
Defining Calculation Elements
Defining Absence Elements
to
Defining Earning and Deduction Elements

Setting up Accumulators
e
ens
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
Defining Processing Elements
s uide
a
h
Using Calendars a)
tG
c
n
e
o
ri tud
Usingta
Schedules
n
oSetting Up
sS
i
@
Triggers
h
t
he use
h
Setting Up Mass Triggers
ara
Defining the Organizational Structure
ra
Sa
(s
e
H
Defining Segmentation
Defining Retroactive Processing

Integrating Absence Management and the Payroll System
Working with Delegations in Absence Management
Setting Up Self Service Absence Transactions
24
Business process chapters
The chapters that follow the implementation chapters discuss business process
considerations that are helpful to both implementers and power users.
Appendixes and report

samples
The appendixes provide reference information about the reports and workflows that are
delivered with the system. Samples of reports appear at the end of the appendixes.
Lesson 2
Review
In this lesson, you learned that:

You can use Absence Management to define complex rules for tracking absences and accruals, send
absence data to payroll, enter and approve absences, and manage a number of other absence-related tasks.
Absence Management integrates with Human Resources, Payroll Interface, and Payroll for North America
directly or indirectly through Time and Labor.
Absence take refers to the amount of time off that a payee actually takes.
You use elementsthe smallest components of the systemto build absence rules and processes.
e
ens
to
To process takes and entitlement, you build frameworks that define which payees to process, the period of
time to process, and the elements to process.
ic
l
e
The five key processing steps are: identify, calculate, review results, correct errors, and
blfinalize.
a
r
fe
s
n
Slide 23
tra
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
u
ah
r
a
(s
e
H
h
a
r
Sa
25
ra
Sa
fe
s
n
a
ra
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
h
(s
e
H
li
e
l
b
e
ens
to
Lesson 3
Creating Schedules
Objectives
By the end of this lesson, you will be able to:
Describe the use of schedules.
to
li
e
l
b
Explain schedule groups.

Create work schedules.
Validate schedule changes.
e
ens
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
Describe holiday schedules.
no
a
s uide
Explain methods of assigning work schedules. ha
a) nt G
c
rio tude
Slide 25
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
u
ah
r
a
(s
e
H
h
a
r
Sa
27
Creating Schedules
Lesson 3
Describing the Use of Schedules
How Absence Management Uses Schedules

Work schedules enable the system to perform the following functions:
Define payees' scheduled days and hours.
Track absence time.
Populate system elements.
Slide 26
to
Student Notes
Using Schedules
e
ens
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
Supporting Elements
t
n is S
o
@to createthother, more complex elements. One type of supporting element are
A supporting element is e
used
h
e as either database system elements or system-computed elements.
s
system elements, which
are classified
h
u
a
System elements
ar are maintained by PeopleSoft and cannot be added to your system. This course discusses
s
(
supporting
e elements further when we discuss the common characteristics of elements, and setting up
H
supporting
elements.
h
a
r
Sa
Scheduling is a mechanism that communicates workforce attendance expectations and facilitates time
planning and compensation. By setting up work schedules, you enable the system to determine if a reported
absence occurred during scheduled work time.
Populating System Elements

System elements are used to store data and are automatically populated during processing. Several system
elements store data related to schedules, such as SCHED HRS, SCHED HRS DB, and SCHED HRS DA.
Many system elements that are related to absence processing can be used when developing absence rules for
your organization's requirements.
28
Lesson 3
Creating Schedules
Describing the Use of Schedules (continued)
Populating System Elements: an Example

John works eight hours a day from Monday through Friday. He is absent Tuesday, January 12 through
Thursday, January 14.
During processing, the system refers to John's schedule to populate the system elements listed in this table:
System
Elements
Jan 10
Jan 11
Jan 12
Jan 13
Jan 14
Jan 15
Jan 16
Jan 17
Sun
Mon
Tue
Wed
Thu
Fri
Sat
Sun
SCHED
HRS
SCHED
HRS DB
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
SCHED
8
8o
8
n
a
HRS DA
e
as uid
h
)
a nt G
c
o
Slide 27
ri tude
a
t
n is S
o
Student Notes
e@ se th
h
u
ah
r
a
(sElements to Populate Daily Data
Using System
e
H
h
a
When
the system processes an absence event, it expands the event and populates a row of data for each day of
r
Sa the absence, as well as one row for the day before (DB) and one row for the day after (DA) the absence. This
information is referred to as daily data. You can use this information in your absence rules.
29
Creating Schedules
Lesson 3
Explaining Schedule Groups
Using Schedule Groups

A schedule group enables you to:
Organize schedules.
Group schedules based on a SetID
Limit the schedules you can assign to a payee.
Slide 28
to
Student Notes
Using Schedule Groups
e
ens
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
Page Used to Create Schedule Groups
t
n is S
o
Use this page to create schedule
th
e@ sgroups:
h
e
u
ah
r
a
Page Name
Navigation
(s
e
H
h
Schedule
Group
Set Up HRMS, Product Related, Global Payroll & Absence Mgmt, Schedules,
a
r
Schedule Groups, Schedule Group
Sa
Think of a schedule group as a schedule organization unit, similar to a business unit both in idea and design.
Shifts, Workdays and Schedule Definitions are created based on a SetID value, and Schedule Groups group
these together by way of the Set Control value.
Examples: Use of Schedule Groups

In the police force, schedules might be organized by police station or region. In a retail organization,
schedules might be organized by store.
30
Lesson 3
Creating Schedules
Note. Schedule groups are similar in concept to business units used in PeopleSoft Enterprise Human
Resources.
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
(s
e
H
31
Creating Schedules
Lesson 3
Creating Work Schedules
Setup Steps
This diagram shows the steps for creating schedules:
e
ens
Slide 29
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
Common Scheduling Components
h
a) nt G
c
Absence Management uses common scheduling

to other PeopleSoft
deLabor. Ifthatyouaresetavailable
rio Timetucomponents
a
t
applications, such as PeopleSoft Enterprise
and
up
schedules
in one application, you
n
S
o
s
can use them in the other. @
hi
t
e
h
e
s
h
u
a
r
(sa
e
H
h
a
r
Sa
Student Notes
32
to
Lesson 3
Creating Schedules
Creating Work Schedules (continued)
Types of Shifts
A shift represents a period of time during the workday. There are three types of shifts:
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
Slide 30
Student Notes
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
Elapsed Shifts
a
sthat employees
de work during the day do not matter so
a
i
For elapsed shifts, you define only a duration. The times
h
u
) (fortexample,
G eight hours).
aspecify
long as they work the amount of time that you
c
n
e
o
ari Stud
t
n
o his
@
Punch Shifts
t
e
h
e
s
ahof multipleu in and out punches. For example, in at 9:00 a.m., out for lunch at 12:00 p.m.,
Punch shifts consist
r
a
s and out at 5:00 p.m.
in at 1:00(p.m.,
e
H
h
a
ar Shifts
SFlex
Flex shifts offer a flexible range of hours that an employee works, but normally there are core hours during a
shift. For example, employees can start and finish any time between 6 a.m. and 9 p.m. so long as they are at
work for the peak time, 11 a.m., and work eight hours. This type of shift might be appropriate for a global
support center.
33
Creating Schedules
Lesson 3
Creating a Shift
Use the Shifts component to create shifts, or enter shift information directly into a schedule definition.
The Shifts component enables you to:
Reuse shifts in schedule definitions.
Override shift assignments using manager self-service pages.
Automatically validate revised punch schedules.
Slide 31
Student Notes
ra
34
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
Use this page to set up elapsed, flex, and punch shifts:as
de
i
h
u
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
u
ah
r
a
(s
e
hH
Page Used to Create Shifts
Sa
e
ens
to
Lesson 3
Creating Schedules
Page Name
Navigation
Shift
Set up HRMS, Product Related, Global Payroll & Absence Mgmt, Schedules, Shifts,
Shift
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
@ Shift Details
th vary by shift type. Also, when you select a shift type of Flex,
eunder
Note. Fields that appear
h
e
s
h the ucore begin and end times, and weekly hours. Time Reporting fields apply only
fields appear for
aentering
r
a
s also using Time and Labor.
when you(are
e
hH
ara
SGuidelines
for Creating Flex or Punch Shifts
When creating flex or punch shifts, the following guidelines apply to the Type, Time, and Duration fields.
35
Creating Schedules
Lesson 3
Field
Guidelines
Type
A Meal or Out punch cannot follow a Break punch.

A Break or Out punch cannot follow a Meal punch.
An Out punch period cannot have a duration.

An Out punch must be preceded by an In punch somewhere in the shift.
You cannot save a punch or flex shift if an Out punch does not have a punch time.
You cannot add punches to a shift after selecting Out in a punch row.
Changing the time of a punch other than the last punch, changes the duration, based on the
Time
new punch time and the subsequent punch time. In addition, changing a punch that is not the
first punch effects the duration of the previous punch, based on the revised punch's new
punch time.
e
ens
to
ic
l
e
previous row. If you enter a duration, the system calculates and populates
bl this field on the
a
next punch row.
r
fe
s
n
tra the punch time for the subsequent
n
If you enter a duration for a punch, the system
populates
no
punch.
a
s uide
aother
h
If you change the time of a)punch
than the last punch, the system calculates the
G
aand subsequent
t
duration based on thec
new
n punch times.
e
o
i
d
r
tu recalculates the duration of the punch above the deleted row
If you delete
theS
system
ntaa row,between
o
s
to the difference
i the punch time of the deleted row and the punch time of the row
@
h
t
e
that
followed
it.
h use
h
a
ar
If you enter a punch time, the system calculates the duration based on the punch time of the
Duration
ra
Sa
(s
e
H
Populating System Elements with Schedule Configuration Totals

The Total fields in the Schedule Configuration Totals group box display durations. For each selected Cfg
(configuration) check box on the Shift Time tab at the bottom of the page, the system updates the
corresponding total field.
During absence processing the total values populate system elements SCHED DFN1, SCHED DFN2,
SCHED DFN3, and SCHED DFN4, as applicable.
36
Lesson 3
Creating Schedules
Creating Workdays
Creating a workday is an optional step. It enables you to:
Add a description for the workday.
Recognize the type of day within your Absence Management rules.
Slide 32
e
ens
Page Used to Create Workdays
li
e
l
b
Use this page to create a workday:

Page Name
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
Workday
ra
Sa
Navigation
to
Set up HRMS, Product Related, Global Payroll & Absence Mgmt, Schedules,
Workdays, Workday
(s
e
H
37
Creating Schedules
Lesson 3
Creating Schedule Definitions

Schedule definitions enable you to:
Produce a single schedule of work expectations over a period of time.
View a schedule calendara range of dates with specified work and non-work times.
Slide 33
Student Notes
e
ens
Pages Used to Create Schedule Definitions

Use these pages to create schedule definitions.
38
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
Use this page to enter basic information for a schedule definition:
no
a
s uide
a
h
Page Name
Navigation
a) nt G
c
io tudeRelated, Global Payroll & Absence Mgmt, Schedules,

Definition
Setta
uprHRMS, Product
nDefinitions,
S
o
s Definition
i
@
h
t
he use
h
ra
a
s
e(
H
h
ra
Sa
li
e
l
b
to
Lesson 3
Creating Schedules
Use this page to select predefined workdays and shifts or to enter shift data:
Page Name
Navigation
Schedule Shifts
Set up HRMS, Product Related, Global Payroll & Absence Mgmt, Schedules,
Definitions, Schedule Shifts
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
(s
e
ScheduleHDefinitions and Shifts
rahIf you have decided not to use the separate Shift component to create shifts, you can enter shift start and end
a
S
times directly into the schedule definition by leaving the Shift ID field empty.
Click the Show Calendar link to view the schedule calendar that the system derives from the schedule
definition.
Personal Schedules
You can create personal schedules for specific employees. To create a personal schedule, you must access the
Schedule Definition component through a link on the Schedule Assignment page.
See Also
Explaining Methods of Assigning Work Schedules
39
Creating Schedules
Lesson 3
Validating Schedule Changes
Validating Schedules
When you change the punch times for a flex or punch shift, you should validate any schedules that include
that shift.
The system enables you to:
View a list of schedules using the revised shift.
Check for overlapping shifts.
e
ens
Slide 34
Student Notes
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
Use this page to validate schedule changes:
a
s uide
a
h
)
tG
Page Name
Navigation ca
n
e
o
ri tud
a
t
n
Schedules to be Validated
Up HRMS,S
Related, Global Payroll & Absence Mgmt, Schedules,
oSet
sbeProduct
i
Schedules
to
Validated
@
h
t
he use
h
ra
a
s
e(
H
h
Page Used to Validate Schedule Calendars
ra
Sa
Note. New schedules do not require validation. Validate schedules after using correction mode to change the
punch times in a shift or after adding a new effective-dated definition to a punch or flex shift.
40
Lesson 3
Creating Schedules
Describing Holiday Schedules
Holiday Schedules
Use a holiday schedule to define:
Public holidays
Company holidays
Slide 35
Student Notes
e
ens
to
Using Holiday Schedules
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
Absence Management populates the system elements, HOLIDAY TYPE and HOLIDAY HRS with the
holiday information you define, which is available for you to use when defining holiday rules.
ra
tr
n
no
Holiday Schedule Hierarchy
a
s uide
a
h
You can specify a holiday schedule on several a
different
) pages,
Gdepending upon the PeopleSoft applications
t
c
n
your organization uses. The system checks

for
a
holiday
schedule
using the following page hierarchy:
e
o
i
d
r
ta Stu
1. Job Data - Payroll page. on
is
@
h
t
e
The system always
hchecksuforsea holiday schedule on the JOB record first.
h
a
r page (PNA only).
aProfile
s
2. Location
(
e
H
h If you are using Payroll for North America, and there is no holiday schedule entry on the payroll page, the
Sa
system uses the schedule specified in the Location table.

3. Pay Group Name page.
If there is no entry on the Location Profile page for PNA, or the Payroll system is Global Payroll, then the
system uses the holiday schedule associated with the Pay Group.
4. Workgroup - Definition page
Finally, the system uses the Holiday Schedule for the workgroup if there is no holiday schedule associated
with the JOB record or the pay group.
Page Used to Define Holiday Schedules

Use this page to define public and company holidays:
41
Creating Schedules
Lesson 3
Page Name
Navigation
Holiday Schedule
Set up HRMS, Foundation Tables, Organization, Holiday Schedule, Holiday

Schedule
e
ens
ra
li
e
l
b
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
42
(s
e
H
to
Lesson 3
Creating Schedules
Explaining Methods of Assigning Work Schedules
Assigning Schedules
You can assign work schedules by:
Attaching the schedule to a pay group.
By default, a payee inherits the pay group's schedule.
Permanently overriding a payee's default schedule.
Creating a personal schedule for a payee.
Slide 36
e
ens
to
Student Notes
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
Use this page to assign a default schedule to a pay group:
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
u
ah
r
a
(s
e
hH
Page Used to Assign a Default Schedule to a Pay Group
ra
Sa
43
Creating Schedules
Lesson 3
Page Name
Navigation
Pay Group Name
Set Up HRMS, Product Related, Global Payroll & Absence Mgmt, Framework,
Organizational, Pay Groups, Pay Group Name
e
ens
ra
li
e
l
b
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
u Default Work Schedule

ah a Payee's
r
Page Used to Override
a
(s to assign a work schedule to an individual payee:
e page
UseHthis
rah
a
S
44
to
Lesson 3
Creating Schedules
Page Name
Navigation
Assign Work Schedule
Global Payroll & Absence Mgmt, Payee Data, Create Overrides, Assign Work
Schedule, Assign Work Schedule
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
e on the schedule Definition page. This link

Click the Create Schedule link to createriaopersonal d
schedule
u
a
t
t
appears only if you select Create
nPersonalisSchedule
S as the assignment method.
o
e@ se th
h
u
ah
r
a
(s
e
H
h
a
r
Sa
45
Creating Schedules
Lesson 3
Activity 1: Creating and Viewing a Work Schedule

In this activity, you will review the activity overview and:

Create a schedule definition for an elapsed schedule.
View the schedule calendar.
Slide 37
e
ens
ra
li
e
l
b
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
46
(s
e
H
to
Lesson 3
Creating Schedules
Activity Overview
In this activity, you will create a definition for an elapsed schedule that consists of five 8-hour shifts and two
off shifts. Use an Effective Date of December 28, 2009.
Note. Use PS for the user name and password in this activity.
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
(s
e
H
47
Creating Schedules
Lesson 3
Activity Detailed Steps
Perform the detailed steps to complete the activity.
Creating a Schedule Definition

To create a schedule definition for an elapsed schedule:
1. Select Set up HRMS, Product Related, Global Payroll & Absence Mgmt, Schedules, Definitions.
2. Select the Add a New Value tab.
3. Enter the following information on the Definitions Search page:
Page Element
Value or Status
SetID
SHARE
Schedule ID
WRKSCH
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
5. Enter the following information on the Definition a
page:
s uide
h
a) nt G
c
Page Element
rio tude Value or Status
a
t
n is S
o
Effective Date
December 28, 2009
@ th
e
h
e
s
h
u
Descriptionra
8 hour (5 day) work schedule
a
s
(
e
H
Definition Type
Elapsed
h
4. Click the Add button.
ra
Sa
Days in Schedule
6. Access the Schedule Shifts page and in the Shift Details region, within the row for Day 1, enter 8.00 in
the Sched Hrs field. Repeat this step for the Day 2, Day 3, Day 4, and Day 5 rows.
7. In the Shift Details region, for the Day 6 row, select the Off Shift check box. Repeat this step for the Day
7 row.
8. Click Save.
Viewing a Calendar Schedule

To view the schedule calendar:
1. Click the Show Calendar link on the Schedule Shifts page.
2. Click the Next Period button to review the following week.
3. To view the calendar for the week of February 8, 2010 select a From Date of February 8, 2010.
48
Lesson 3
Creating Schedules
4. Click the Load Calendar button.

5. Click OK to return to the Schedule Shifts page.
This concludes the activity. Please do not continue.
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
(s
e
H
49
Creating Schedules
Lesson 3
Review

Schedules enable the system to determine whether a reported absence occurred on a workday.
Schedule groups control the schedules that you can assign.
You can use three components to create work schedules: shifts, workdays, schedule definitions.
Schedule calendars display a range of dates that indicate work time and off days.
After changing punch times on a punch or flex shift you should validate schedules for overlapping shifts.
Holiday schedules are used during absence processing to determine if an absence fell on a paid holiday.
e
ens
to
By default, payees inherit the work schedule that is assigned to their pay group; you can override a payee's
default schedule or create a personal schedule.
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
Slide 38
tr
n
no
Student Notes
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
Additional Resources
rio tude
a
t
This table lists additional resources
n that provide
S more details about the topics that we have discussed in this
o
s
i
lesson:
e@ se th
h
u
ah
r
a
Topic
See
(s
e
H
h
Creating shifts
PeopleSoft Enterprise Absence Management 9.1 PeopleBook, "Using Schedules,"
a
r
Setting Up Shifts
a
S
50
Creating work schedules

Creating and Viewing Schedules.
Viewing a schedule calendar

Creating and Viewing Schedules.
Defining holiday schedules

Defining Holiday Schedules.
Assigning and overriding

schedules

Assigning Work Schedules.
Validating a schedule

Validating Work Schedules.
Lesson 4
Defining Common Characteristics of

Elements
Objectives
e
ens
to
Explain element categories.
ra
fe
s
n
a
Describe the Element Name page.
li
e
l
b
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
Slide 40
ra
Sa
(s
e
H
51
Defining Common Characteristics of Elements
Lesson 4
Explaining Elements Categories
Element Categories
Elements are the building blocks that define your absence rules and processes. They fall into these categories:
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
Slide 41
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
Element Categories
a) nt G
c
rio tude
This table describes each category ofaelements.
t
n is S
o
h
e@ se tExplanation
Category
h
u
ah
r
a
Primary elements
The four primary elements are absence takes, absence entitlements, earnings,
(s
e
and deductions.
H
h
ra
Supporting elements include formulas, brackets, and other supporting
Sa Supporting elements
elements that do not stand alone, but are used to create other, more complex
Student Notes
elements.
Other elements
These elements define eligibility criteria and processing order.
This table categorizes elements by type:
52
Lesson 4
Primary Elements
Supporting Elements
Other Elements
Absence entitlements
System elements
Rounding rules
Absence takes
Arrays
Proration rules
Deductions
Brackets
Accumulators
Earnings
Rate codes
Element groups
Variables
Sections
Dates
Process lists
Duration
Generation control
Formulas
Historical rules
Counts
Writable arrays
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
(s
e
H
53
Lesson 4
Defining Basic Element Parameters
Creating Country-Specific Absence Types

You can define an absence type for:
e
ens
ra
li
e
l
b
tr
n
no
a
s uide
Student Notes
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
Page Used to Define a Country Record
t
n is S
o
@ Record:
Use this page to Define aeCountry
th
h
e
s
u
ah
r
a
(s
e
H
h
a
r
Sa
fe
s
n
a
Slide 42
54
to
Lesson 4
Page Name
Navigation
Countries
Set Up HRMS, Product Related, Global Payroll & Absence Mgmt, System Settings,
Countries
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
(s
e
H
55
Lesson 4
Defining Basic Element Parameters (continued)
Common Element Attributes

All elements share a common set of attributes that you define on the Element Name page:
Element (PIN) number.
Definition as of date.
Field format.
Recalculation instructions.
Element use (ownership) information.
Override levels.
Storage instructions for results.
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
Slide 43
a
h
a) nt G
c
Student Notes
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
th
e@Names
Page Used to Define Element
h
e
s
h
u and basic attributes of an absence entitlement element:
adefine
r
Use this page
to
the
name
a
(s
e
H
h
a
r
Sa
Custom fields and comments.
56
e
ens
to
Lesson 4
Page Name
Navigation
Absence Entitlement Name
Set Up HRMS, Product Related, Global Payroll & Absence Mgmt, Elements,
Absence Elements, Absence Entitlements
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
(s
e
H
57
Lesson 4
PIN Numbers
A PIN (Pay Item Name) number is a numerical identifier for an element that is:
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
Slide 44
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
PIN Number Information
a) nt G
c
In essence, a PIN and an element are identical.

ise
the technical name and element is the functional name
io PIN
d
r
u
a
t
t
for the same thing.
n
o his S
@
e se t
A PIN number:
h
u
ahassigned when
r
a
Is automatically
you create an element.
(s
e
IsHunique; each element has its own PIN number.
h
a
r
Sa Is referred to by the system (instead of name) when accessing and processing elements.
Student Notes
This enables you to change an element's name without impacting the system and improves processing
performance because it is more efficient for the system to use numeric values than character values.
58
Lesson 4
Definition As Of Date
The Definition As Of Date field determines which date the system uses to retrieve the element's definition.
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
Slide 45
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
Student Notes
u
ah
r
a
(s
e
Example:HHow the System Interprets the Use Definition As Of Field
rahAssume that a pay period has the calendar dates that are shown in this table:
a
S
Field
Value
Calendar Begin Date
January 1, 2010
Calendar End Date
January 31, 2010
Payment Date
February 1, 2010
Now, say that an absence entitlement element has the following effective-dated definitions (rows):
59
Lesson 4
Effective Date
Value
January 1, 2005
10
January 1, 2010
12
January 31, 2010
15
February 1, 2010
17
This table lists the definition that the system uses for the different values of the Definition As Of Date field:
Definition As Of Date field
Effective-Dated Definition Used
Calendar Begin Date
January 1, 2010 row (12).
Calendar End Date
January 31, 2010 row (15).
Payment Date
February 1, 2010 row (17).
ra
Sa
60
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
(s
e
H
e
ens
to
Lesson 4
Field Format
The Field Format field defines the format in which the element's value is resolved.
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
Slide 46
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
Student Notes
u
ah
r
a
(s
e
AvailableHFormats
rahThe available formats vary by element type.
a
S
61
Lesson 4
Always Recalculate Check Box

The Always Recalculate check box controls whether the system recalculates the element each time it
encounters it during the processing period.
This diagram illustrates your choices:
to
Slide 47
Student Notes
e
ens
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
Entering Recalculation Instructions for Sections s
de
a
i
h
u
) onttheGElement Name page or when defining sections.
You can enter recalculation instructions for an
aelement
c
n
e
We discuss sections in a later lesson. rio
d
nta is Stu
o
See Also
e@ se th
h
Lesson 9, 'Describing
u Framework,' Defining Sections
ah the Processing
r
a
(s
e
H
h
a
r
Sa
62
Lesson 4
Defining Element Use

You define several online security-related options in the Element Use group box, including:
Owner
Class
Used By
Industry/Region
Category
to
Slide 48
Student Notes
e
ens
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
The Element Use Group Box
a
h
)
tG
A brief explanation of each field follows: ca
n
e
o
ari Stud
t
n
o his
@
t
e
h
e
s
u
ah
r
a
(s
e
H
h
a
r
Sa
63
Lesson 4
Identifies who controls and maintains the definition of the element. Values are:
Owner
Customer Maintained
Identifies the elements that you created. All fields are available for entry.
PS Delivered/Maintained
The element is delivered and maintained by PeopleSoft. Taking control of an
element changes the value in the Owner field to PS Delivered/Customer
Modified. If PeopleSoft later releases an updated version of the element, you
can accept the updated definition or retain your changes. Either way, element
ownership does not change. If you change the name, description, override
levels, class, industry, or category for an absence element, the system makes the
same changes to all related components and auto generated accumulators and
changes the owner for those items.
Important! Taking control of an element is irreversible.
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
PS Delivered/Not Maintained
ra
fe
s
n
a
The element is delivered, but not maintained by PeopleSoft (for example,

sample data or statutory data). You can update any editable fields.
tr
n
no
a
Indicates that you have taken
ofea PeopleSoft-delivered or maintained
s control
d
a
i
h
u
element.
a) nt G
c
PS Delivered/Maintained/Secure
rio tude
a
t
nelementisis S
o
The
delivered and maintained by PeopleSoft. You can edit the name,
@description,
h override
t
e
levels, results, custom fields, and comments (and for
h
e
s
h
u
system
elements,
Use
as Chartfield and prompt view). Any changes that you
a
ar
PS Delivered/Customer Modified
(s
e
H
rahClass
a
S
64
make can be overwritten by future PeopleSoft updates.
Works with the Owner field to determine the level of security.
Used By and Country
Identifies whether the element can be used by all countries or by a specific

country only. These fields are controlled by settings that you define on the User
Rules Profile page.
Industry/Region and
Category
Provide ways to classify elements.
Lesson 4
Element Ownership
A user that can take control of and modify elements has the following capabilities regarding the Owner field
on the Element Name page:
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
Student Notes
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
Page Used to Control Access to Elements

rio tude
a
t
n iselements
S that are defined as PS Delivered/Maintained by selecting
Enable users to take control of o
and modify
@
h
t
e field
the Allow PS Element h
Change
eon the Global Payroll User Profile page.
s
h
u
a
Use this page
tor control access to elements:
a
s
e(
H
Navigation
rahPage Name
a
S
Slide 49
Global Payroll User Profile
Set Up HRMS, Security, User Maintenance, Global Payroll User Profile
65
Lesson 4
Element Usage
This diagram shows how the Used By field on the User Rules Profile page controls what a user can do
through the Element Name page.
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
Slide 50
a
h
a) nt G
c
Student Notes
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
Example
h
u
ahuser ID GPBRA
r
a
Say that you
want
to be able to define rules for Brazil only. You configure the User Rules
(s
Profileepage as follows:
H
h
a
r
Sa
When the user accesses the Element Name page to create an element, the Used By field defaults to Specific
Country and the Country field defaults to BRA. The user can create elements for Brazil only (as well as view
elements that are defined for ALL countries).
66
Lesson 4
Industry/Region and Category Types

You can classify elements by:
e
ens
to
Slide 51
Student Notes
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s Types
de
Pages Used to Define Industry, Region and Category
a
i
h
u
)
acategory
tG
c
Use these pages to define industry, regions,and
types.
n
e
o
ri tud
a
t
n
Use this page to define industry
o and hregion
s Scodes for a given country:
i
@
t
he use
h
Page Name ra
Navigation
a
s
e(
Industries/Regions
H
h
Industries/Regions
ra
a
S
67
Lesson 4
Use this page to define category types for a given country:

Page Name
Navigation
Categories
Categories
e
ens
ra
li
e
l
b
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
68
(s
e
H
to
Lesson 4
Overriding Levels
You can select the following security-related override levels for an element in the Override Levels group box:
Pay Entity
Pay Group
Payee
Calendar
Via Elements
to
Element Definition
Positive Input
e
ens
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
Student Notes
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
Override Levels Group Box
n is S
o
th group box on the Name page to define when an element's value
e@
Use the check boxes inhthe
Override
Levels
e
s
can be overridden.
u
ah
r
a
(s
In thisegroup box, you enable security-related override levels for the selected element. That is, you define
H users can override the element's value, or, in some cases, exclude the element from processing.
when
h
a
r
Sa For example, if you select Calendar, you can use the Calendar - Excluded Elements page to tell the system
Slide 52
not to process this element for any payee associated with a particular calendar. If you select Calendar for a
bracket, date, duration, formula, or variable element, you can use the Calendar - Overrides page to have the
system use an override value for the element when the system processes a particular calendar.
See Also
Overriding Supporting Elements
69
Lesson 4
Results Group Box

The fields in the Results region control whether to write an element's results to the result tables:
Store results for retroactive processing, reporting, auditing, or historical rules.
Select Store and Store if Zero to write an element to the result tables even if the resolved value is zero,
blank, or null.
If you select neither option, no results are written to the result tables.
Only store results that are necessary for your business needs.
li
e
l
b
Storing results for all elements can affect system performance.
ra
fe
s
n
a
Slide 53
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
70
(s
e
H
e
ens
to
Lesson 4
Custom Fields and Comments

For each element that you create, you can:
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
Use the links at the bottom of the Element Name page to access pages for entering this information.
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
Student Notes
a
h
a) nt G
c
o ude
riand
a
Pages Used to Create Custom Fields
t Comments
t
n is SEnter
o
@ fieldsthand enter comments.
Use these pages to createecustom
h
e
s
h
u
a
Use this page
arto define custom fields for an element:
s
(
e
H
Navigation
rah Page Name
a
S
1. Navigate to the Element Name page for the type of element that you're
Slide 54
Custom Fields
defining (Set Up HRMS, Product Related, Global Payroll & Absence Mgmt,
Elements, <element type>, <element name>
2. Click the Custom Fields link on the Element Name page.
You can use the fields on this page in any way that you want. For example, you can use the fields to
classify elements or to indicate a sorting order for reports. The data that you enter is stored by system
elements.
71
Lesson 4
Use the Comments page to enter or view custom fields for an element.
Page Name
Navigation
Comments
Click the Comments link on the Element Name page.
For elements that you define, you can use the Comments page to view or enter your own notes or details
about an element. Comments are for informational purposes only and do not affect absence processing.
For each system-computed system element that is delivered with Absence Management, you can view
detailed comments including a general description, when the system element is available, and where it is
used. This is useful information when you want to learn about what a specific system element does.
e
ens
ra
li
e
l
b
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
72
(s
e
H
to
Lesson 4
Review

Elements are categorized as primary elements, supporting elements, and other elements.
Each element corresponds to an element type, such as AE for an absence entitlement element.
The Entry Type page restricts the valid entry types in an element definition.
The Element Name page is the first page for all element definitions.
Slide 55
Student Notes
Setup Considerations for Elements
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no this
What date do I want the resolution program to use when processing
a
e element?
s
d
a
i
u
What field format do I need for this element?a) h
G
t
c den
o
i
r
Do I need to recalculate this element?
nta is Stu
o
Who will maintain this element?
e@ se th
h
u be used?
In what country
ahwill this element
r
a
(s
e
Is this
element specific to an industry, region, or category?
hH
Consider the following before setting up elements:
ra What types of override levels does this element need?
Sa
Do I need to store the results of this element?
This table lists additional resources that provide more details about the topics that we have discussed in this
lesson:
73
Lesson 4
Topic
See
Element types
PeopleSoft Enterprise Absence Management 9.1 PeopleBook, "Defining General

Element Information," Working with Element Types
Entry types

Element Information," Defining Element Types
Entry type prompts

Element Information," Selecting Entry Types and Displaying Record. Field
Combinations
Element names

Element Information," Defining an Element Name
PeopleSoft Enterprise Absence Management 9.1 PeopleBook"Defining General
Element Information," Defining Industries and Categories
e
ens
PeopleSoft Enterprise Absence Management 9.1 PeopleBook, "Defining

Security," Restricting User Access
ra
li
e
l
b
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
74
(s
e
H
to
Lesson 5
Defining Absence Entitlement Elements

Objectives
Describe entitlement accrual.
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
Create absence entitlement elements.

Modify entitlement balance accumulators.
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
Slide 57
ra
Sa
(s
e
H
75
Lesson 5
Describing Entitlement Accrual
Accrual Methods
This diagram shows the two methods of accruing entitlement:
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
)
a
tG
c
n
Slide 58
e
o
ari Stud
t
n
o his
Student Notes
@
t
e
h
e
s
u
ah
r
a
Purpose of Absence
(s Entitlement Elements
e
H
h
Absence entitlement elements define the conditions under which payees accrue paid time off and the amount
a
r
they can accrue. You use absence entitlements to create elements for each type of entitlement that
Sa ofyourtimeorganization
offers. For example, you might have separate accrual policies for sick leave, vacation, long
service leave, maternity leave, and so on, for which you create separate entitlement elements.
Frequency-Based Accrual
Frequency-based entitlement can accrue each pay period or at another frequency that you define.
76
Lesson 5
Creating Absence Entitlement Elements
Absence Entitlements Component

Use the Absence Entitlements component to specify the following information about an entitlement:
e
ens
to
Slide 59
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
Student Notes
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
Pages in the Absence Entitlements Component
c
io tthese
depages:
rcontains
u
a
The Absence Entitlements component
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
u
ah
r
a
(s
e
H
h
a
r
Sa
77
Lesson 5
Page
Entitlement Parameters
Element Name (GP_PIN).
Calculation
The method of accruing entitlement (frequency- or absence-based).
The entitlement amount.

Generation control for resolving entitlement or defining a frequency
factor.
Instructions for adjusting the entitlement balance when specified

conditions are met.
Rounding/Proration
Rounding and proration rules.
Auto Generated Accumulators
User keys for tracking entitlement balances.

When accumulation of entitlement is to occur.
e
ens
li
e
l
b
era
f
s
Which auto-generated accumulators
anto produce.
r
t
on
n
a dtheevalue
of a supporting element.
Supporting Element Overrides
Instructions fors
overriding
a
i
h Gu
)
a
c dent
o
i
r
nta is Stu
o
e@ se th
h
u
ah
r
a
(s
e
H
h
a
r
The start date and length of the accumulation period.
Sa
78
to
Lesson 5
Creating Absence Entitlement Elements (continued)
Naming an Entitlement Element

Use the Absence Entitlement Name page to:
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
Student Notes
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
Page Used to Name an Absence Entitlement

de
rio tuElement
a
t
nbasic parameters
o
Use this page to name and define
s S for an absence entitlement element:
i
@
h
t
he use
h
ra
a
s
e(
H
rah
a
S
Slide 60
79
Lesson 5
Page Name
Navigation
Set up HRMS, Product Related, Global Payroll & Absence Mgmt, Elements,
Absence Elements, Absence Entitlements, Absence Entitlement Name
e
ens
ra
li
e
l
b
fe
s
n
a
ra
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n andisBalance
S Inquiry Processes
See Lesson 21: Defining Forecasting
o
@
h
t
he use
h
ra
a
s
e(
H
h
Sa
80
to
Lesson 5
Defining Calculation Instructions

Use the Absence Entitlements - Calculation page to specify:
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
Student Notes
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
Page Used to Define Calculation Instructions

dean Absence Entitlement
rio tufor
a
t
nand frequency
o
Use this page to define the amount
s S of the absence entitlement:
i
@
h
t
he use
h
ra
a
s
e(
H
rah
a
S
Slide 61
81
Lesson 5
Page Name
Navigation
Calculation
Absence Elements, Absence Entitlements, Calculation
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
Calculate When Absence Occurs
a) nt G
c
deoption, the Per Absence Formula Element field

rio Occurs
When you select the Calculate When
Absence
u
a
t
t
n element
S defines the conditions under which the entitlement element is
appears. You must select a formula
that
o
s
i
@
h
t
resolved.
he use
h
a
rentitlement
Absence-based
is covered in greater detail in Lesson 18: Defining Absence-Based Entitlements
a
s
(
and Takes.
e
H
rah
a
SAdjustment and Payoff Fields
These fields define conditions under which the system should automatically adjust a payee's unused
entitlement. The feature applies to frequency-based entitlements only, and enables you to specify what the
system should do with entitlement that has not been used by a certain date. Use generation control to define
when the adjustment is to occur.
See Lesson 18: Defining Absence-Based Entitlements and Takes
82
Lesson 5
Defining Rounding and Proration Instructions

Use the Rounding/Proration page to define rules for:
Rounding entitlement units
Prorating entitlement units
Slide 62
Student Notes
e
ens
to
ic
l
e
Page Used to Define Rounding and Proration Rules for Absence Entitlement
bl
a
r
fe
s
Use this page to define rounding and proration rules for the absence entitlement:
n
tra
n
Page Name
Navigation
no
a
s uide
a
h
Rounding/Proration
Set up HRMS, Product
Related,G
Global Payroll & Absence Mgmt, Elements,
a)Absence
t
c
Absence Elements,
Entitlements,
Rounding/Proration
n
e
o
i
d
r
nta is Stu
o
e@ se th
h
u
ah
r
a
(s
e
H
h
a
r
Sa
Note. Proration applies only to frequency-based entitlement.
83
Lesson 5
Defining Instructions for Entitlement Accumulators

Accumulators are elements that track balances. When you create an entitlement element, the system
automatically generates an accumulator that tracks the entitlement balance.
You can:
Select user keys
Balance accumulation basis
e
ens
Slide 63
Student Notes
ra
84
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no balances:
Use this page to select the user keys, and the basis for accumulating
a
e
s
d
a
i
h Gu
)
a
c dent
o
i
r
nta is Stu
o
e@ se th
h
u
ah
r
a
(s
e
hH
Page Used to Select Accumulator User Keys and Basis
Sa
li
e
l
b
to
Lesson 5
Page Name
Navigation
Auto Generated Accumulators
Absence Elements, Absence Entitlements, Auto Generated Accumulators
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
a
r
Note. Selecting
the Job (EMPLID/EMPL_RCD) option instructs the system to use EmplID/Rcd (employee
a
(sas a key field. If a payee has multiple jobs, the system will store the results for each job in a
ID/record)
e
H accumulator.
separate
h
a
r
Sa
Example: Using the User Keys

To have the system accumulate a payee's entitlement by department, you can select SystemElem in the User
Key Type 1 field and DEPTID in the Key Element 1 field.
85
Lesson 5
Defining Instructions for Entitlement Accumulators (continued)

You can specify whether an entitlement should accumulate based on the period begin date, the period end
date, the payment date, or a specified date.
To illustrate how this selection affects accumulator values, consider the periods in this diagram:
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
Slide 64
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
Student Notes
c
rio tude
a
t
on his S
Using the Based On Field @
e se t
h
Use the Based rOn

ahfield on theuAuto Generated Accumulators page to specify when the system is to update an
a
entitlement
selement's accumulators. Options are: Period End Date, Period Begin Date, Payment Date, or
(Date.
e
Specified
H
h
a
r
Sa
Example: Accumulate Based On Period Begin Date Versus Period End Date
Assume the following:
Entitlement has a month-to-date (MTD) accumulator.
Pay frequency is weekly.
Period begin date = December 26.
Period end date = January 3.
The period in which the entitlement balance accumulates depends upon the value that you select in the Based
On field:
If you select Period Begin Date (December 26), the balance is incremented in December.
If you select Period End Date (January 3), the balance is incremented in January of the following year.
86
Lesson 5
Defining Instructions for Entitlement Accumulators (continued)

Use the Accumulator Periods for Element <name> page to define:
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
Slide 65
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
Student Notes
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
Page Used to Define an Entitlement
e@ se thElement's Accumulation Period and Auto-Generated
h
Accumulators
u
ah
r
a
Use this page
(s to define the accumulation period and to select the accumulators to generate:
e
H
h
a
r
Sa
87
Lesson 5
Page Name
Navigation
Accumulator Periods for

Element <name> page
Absence Elements, Absence Entitlements, Auto Generated Accumulators
Click the Accumulator Periods link on the Auto Generated Accumulators page.
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
io tude
r
a
t
Auto Generated Accumulators n
o his S
@
t for the unused entitlement balance. The Balance check box is
The system always creates
e an accumulator
h
e
s
automatically selected
u you of this.
ah to remind
r
a
(s check boxes in the Auto Generated Accumulators group box to specify additional accumulators
Use the
other
e
thatH
you want the system to create when you save the new element. (The Entitlement accumulator tracks the
h
a
r
total
number of entitlement units that the payee has accrued during the accumulation period, including those
Sa that have
been used.)
88
Lesson 5
Viewing the Generated Entitlement Accumulators

You can view the accumulators for an entitlement:
to
li
e
l
b
Slide 66
Student Notes
e
ens
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
o
Page Used to View an Entitlement's Accumulators a n
e
s
d
a
i
haccumulators
uafter you save an entitlement element:
Use this page to view the element's auto-generated
)
G
a
t
c den
o
i
r
Page Name
Navigation
nta is Stu
o
h
e@ Set
Generated Elements for
up tHRMS, Product Related, Global Payroll & Absence Mgmt, Elements,
h
e
s
h
Element <name> a
page
uAbsence Elements, Absence Entitlements, Auto Generated Accumulators
r
a
(s
Click the View Generated Elements link on the Auto Generated Accumulators page.
e
H
rah
a
S
89
Lesson 5
Modifying Entitlement Balance Accumulators
Using the Accumulators Component

After the system generates entitlement accumulators, you can use the Accumulators component to:
e
ens
li
e
l
b
ra
Slide 67
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
Student Notes
a
s uide
a
h
a) Forward
t GEntitlement Balances
c
Page Used to Enter Instructions for Carrying
n
e
o
ri tud
acarrying
t
Use this page to enter instructionsnfor
Sforward an entitlement balance:
o
s
i
e@ se th
h
u
ah
r
a
(s
e
H
h
a
r
Sa
90
to
Lesson 5
Page Name
Navigation
Definition
Supporting Elements, Accumulators, Definition
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
(s
e
H
Using an Initialize Rule to Carry Forward Entitlement Balances
frequency-based entitlements, you can have the system carry forward all or part of the balance at the end
rahFor
a
of
the
accumulation period. For example, at the beginning of a new calendar year, you might want to carry
S
over the previous year's value of a year to date (YTD) accumulator that contains accrued vacation time,
subject to certain limits.
You can use an initialize rule element for this purpose. When the system creates the accumulator for the new
year, it invokes the formula specified in the Initialize Rule Element field on the Period page.
Without an initialize rule, the system sets the remaining balance to zero at the beginning of the new
accumulation period.
91
Lesson 5
Modifying Entitlement Balance Accumulators (continued)
Using the Accumulators Component (continued)

The Accumulators - Members page is where you define the elements that contribute to an accumulator.
Specify the following information for each element:
e
ens
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
Slide 68
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
(s
e
H
h
Student
ara Notes
Page Used to Define Elements that Contribute to an Accumulator

Use this page to define the list of elements that contribute to or subtract from an accumulator:
92
to
Lesson 5
Page Name
Navigation
Members
Supporting Elements, Accumulators, Members
e
ens
to
Member List for an Entitlement Balance Accumulator
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
This example shows what the Members page looks like immediately after the system creates the balance
accumulator for an entitlement element:
tr
n
o
The balance accumulator contains three member elements: then
entitlement
element plus two auto-assigned
a
elements that represent units paid and units adjusted. s

e
a
id
h
u
)
abalance naccumulator
t G as follows:
By default, the system resolves the entitlement
c
e
o
d Adjusted.
ari PaidS+tuUnits
Entitlement balance = Entitlement
-tUnits
n
o his
@
t is calculated by adding or removing elements that contribute to or
e
You can modify the way
that
the
balance
h
e
s
h
deduct from thera
balance.
u
a
(s
e
hH
ra
Sa
93
Lesson 5
Activity 2: Creating a Frequency-based Entitlement Element

In this activity you will review the activity overview and create a frequency-based entitlement element.
Slide 69
e
ens
ra
li
e
l
b
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
94
(s
e
H
to
Lesson 5
Activity Overview
In this activity, you will create a frequency-based entitlement element for paid time off called PTO Ent. The
element is effective January 1, 2010 and overrides are allowed at the payee and positive input levels.
Employees accrue 20 days of PTO entitlement each year. Select all accumulators for the element.
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
(s
e
H
95
Lesson 5
Creating a Frequency-based Entitlement Element

To create a new frequency-based entitlement for paid time off:
1. Select Set up HRMS, Product Related, Global Payroll & Absence Mgmt, Elements, Absence Elements,
Absence Entitlements.
2. Select Add a New Value.
3. Enter the following information on the Absence Entitlement Name page:
Value or Status
Name
PTO Ent
Entitlement Unit
20
Calculate Per Other Frequency
Selected
Frequency ID
A (Annual)
li
e
l
b
ra
sfe
Description
PTO Entitlementan
tr
n
no
Override Level - Payee
Selected
a
s uide
a
h
Override Level - Positive Input
G
a) ntSelected
c
e
o
i tud
arthe
t
4. Enter the following information
on
Calculation
page:
n
S
o
s
@ thi
e
h
e
Page Element h
Value or Status
s
u
a
r
(saDate
Effective
January 1, 2010
e
H
h
ra
Sa
Page Element
e
ens
5. Access the Auto Generated Accumulators page and click the Accumulator Periods link to access the
Accumulator Periods for Element <name> page.
6. Enter the following In the Auto Generated Accumulators group box:
96
Page Element
Value or Status
Entitlement
Selected
Adjustment
Selected
Paid Units
Selected
to
Lesson 5
7. Click OK.
8. Click Save.
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
(s
e
H
97
Lesson 5
Review

Entitlement accrual can be frequency-based or absence-based.
You use the Absence Entitlements - Calculation page to define the amount and frequency of the absence
entitlement.
After you create an entitlement element, you can use the Accumulators component to modify the systemgenerated accumulator that tracks the entitlement balances.
Slide 70
Student Notes
e
ens
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
Topic
See
a) nt G
c
deAbsence Management 9.1 PeopleBook, "Defining Absence

rio Enterprise
u
a
Absence entitlement elements
PeopleSoft
t
t
nElements,"
S Absence Entitlement Elements
o
s Defining
i
@
h
t
he usePeopleSoft Enterprise Absence Management 9.1 PeopleBook, "Defining General
Element suffixes ah
ar
Element Information," Defining Suffixes
s
(
e
hH
lesson:
ra
Sa
98
to
Lesson 6
Defining Absence Take Elements

Objectives
Explain absence types and reasons.
to
li
e
l
b
Describe absence take elements.

Create absence take elements.
Describe absence setup guidelines.
e
ens
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
Slide 72
ra
Sa
(s
e
H
99
Lesson 6
Explaining Absence Types and Reasons
Describing Absence Types and Reasons

Absence types and reasons help categorize absence events and have the following relationships:
Each absence type can have multiple reasons.
You must associate one absence type with each absence take element.
Slide 73
Student Notes
e
ens
to
Purpose of Absence Types and Reasons
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
Absence types and reasons help categorize absence events so that you can track why employees are absent
from work.
tr
n
no
Each absence type can have multiple reasons.
a
s uide
a
h
For example, you might define the absence type
reasons such as Flu or Cold.
G
a) ILL with
t
c
n
io eachtuabsence
de take element.
rwith
You must associate one absence type
a
t
on his theSabsence type and reason.
When entering absences,@
users can tselect
he use
h
During processing,
ra the system populates the ABSENCE TYPE and ABSENCE REASON system elements.
a
s
e(
H
h to Create Absence Types and Reasons
Page
raUsed
a
S Use this page to create absence types and reasons:
100
Lesson 6
Page Name
Navigation
Absence Types
Absence Elements, Absence Take Types, Absence Types
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
A separate set of absence types must be defined for eachscountry thate
d will use the self-service absence
a
i
h
features.
u
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
u
ah
r
a
(s
e
H
h
a
r
Sa
101
Lesson 6
Describing Absence Take Elements
Purpose of Absence Take Elements

Absence take elements define the rules that determine whether an absence should be paid.
This diagram illustrates the ability to link a take element to entitlement elements, earning elements, and
deduction elements:
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
Slide 74
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
Student Notes
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
u
ah Elements
r
Creating Absence
Take
a
(s
e
You
can
create
a separate take element for each type of absence your organization recognizes.
H
h
ra
different rules for compensating sick leave, vacation, long serve leave, or other leaves of absence,
Sa Ifyouyoucanhave
create a separate take element for each.
102
Lesson 6
Creating Absence Take Elements
The Absence Take Component

To define an absence take element, use the Absence Take component to specify:
The element name
Calculation rules
How to determine absence duration
Entitlement conditions
Negative balance rules
e
ens
to
Priorities
ra
fe
s
n
a
Forecasting Rules
li
e
l
b
tr
n
no
a
s uide
Slide 75
a
h
a) nt G
c
Student Notes
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
th
e@
Pages in the Absence Take
Component
h
e
s
ahcomponentucontains these pages:
r
The Absence
Take
a
(s
e
H
h
a
r
Sa
Override rules
103
Lesson 6
Page
Take Parameters
Absence Take Name
Element name
Calculation
The type of absence (for example, vacation or sick).
Entitlement elements to which the take is linked.

Whether absence events require online approval before processing.
Additional data specific to your organization (entered in the user-defined fields).
Day Formula
The day formula for calculating a day count.

Conditions for automatically offsetting (reducing) the beginning entitlement
balance when resolving absence-based entitlement.
When to create duplicate events for another take, if applicable.

Linked earning and deduction elements.
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
Elements that return units and percentages associated with earnings.
r
t
n
Period
Eligibility, minimum absence,norowait per absence requirements that must be
satisfied before a payee can
ause entitlement
e balances.
s
d
a
i
hlinking absence
u events when the take is associated with
Requirements
for
)
G
a
t
absence-based
n
c entitlement.
e
o
i
d
r
nta is Stu
o
Negative Balance
the system should take when the entitlement balance is not
@ The tactions
h to that
e
h
e
sufficient
cover
an absence.
s
h
u
a
ar
Priority (s
Whether users can enter more than one absence for a payee for the same day.
e
H
Assign a priority to absence takes if only one type of absence can be taken on a
rah
Sa
particular day.
Forecasting
Forecasting rules.
Formula for absence forecasting, and list of elements to be returned for display
during forecasting.
104
Balance Inquiry
List of elements to return during balance forecasting.
User Defined Result Fields
User defined data that can be overwritten in the Absence Daily Data results.
Supporting Element Override
Instructions for overriding the value of a supporting element.
Lesson 6
Creating Absence Take Elements (continued)
Naming an Absence Take Element

Use the Absence Take Name page to:
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
Student Notes
a
h
a) nt G
c
de
rioElement
u
a
Page Used to Name an Absence Take
t
t
n is S
o
Use this page to name and
define basic
thparameters for an absence take element:
e@
h
e
s
u
ah
r
a
(s
e
H
h
a
r
Sa
Slide 76
105
Lesson 6
Page Name
Navigation
Absence Take Name
Absence Elements, Absence Takes, Absence Take Name
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
npage iares the
S same for every element. This page was discussed in lesson 4,
o
Note. Fields on the Element Name
@
h
t
"Defining General Element
he Information."
e
s
h
u
a
ar
s
(
eto Enable Forecasting for a Take Element
H
Page Used
rahUse the Forecasting page to indicate whether to use the forecasting feature for this absence take:
a
S
Page Name
Navigation
Forecasting
Absence Elements, Absence Takes, Absence Take Name
Click the Forecasting link on the Absence Take Name page.
106
Lesson 6
Note. To avoid degrading system performance, select the Forecasting Used check box only for those take
elements that you are interested in forecasting.
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
(s
e
H
107
Lesson 6
Defining Calculation Instructions for a Take Element

Use the Absence Takes - Calculation page to specify:
e
ens
ra
li
e
l
b
tr
n
no
a
Student Notes
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
de Element
riofor atuTake
Page Used to Define Calculation Rules
a
t
S
on rules
s for
i
Use this page to define the@
calculationth
a take element:
e
h
e
s
h
u
a
r
(sa
e
H
h
a
r
Sa
fe
s
n
a
Slide 77
108
to
Lesson 6
Page Name
Navigation
Absence Takes - Calculation
Absence Elements, Absence Takes, Calculation
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
Manager Approval Required
a) nt G
c
e absences that are entered through the Absence Event

If you select the Manager Approval Required
dbox,
rio check
u
a
t
t
Entry page for this take element must
n beiapproved.
S In other words, someone must select the Manager
o
s
Approved check box for the
absence
before
it
@ th can be processed by the Take process. (The Manager Approval
e
h
eto absences reported through the self-service pages.)
Required check box
does
not
apply
s
h
u
a
ar
s
(
eMember List
H
Entitlement
rahThese fields specify which entitlement balances to use when an absence is reported for this take. When you
a
S
run the Take process, the system reduces entitlement balances in the order that you specify. All entitlement
elements associated with the take must use the same accrual method (frequency-based or absence-based).
User Defined Fields

You can enter alphanumeric data in these fields. When you run the Take process, the data in these fields
populates the TAKE CONFIG1 (take configuration 1) through TAKE CONFIG 4 system elements.
Consequently, your absence formulas can use any of the data that you enter in these fields.
109
Lesson 6
Selecting the Day Formula and Other Take Parameters

Use the Absence Takes - Day Formula page to:
e
ens
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
Slide 78
no
a
s uide
a
h
Student Notes
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n iand
o
Page Used to Select the Day Formula
s SOther Absence Take Parameters
@
h
t
e day formula
hthe
e and other parameters for a take element:
Use this page to define

s
h
u
a
ar
s
(
e
H
rah
a
S
110
to
Lesson 6
Page Name
Navigation
Day Formula
Absence Elements, Absence Takes, Day Formula
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
(s
e
H
111
Lesson 6
The Day Formula

This diagram illustrates a simple day count formula named DAY FM. The formula populates the system
element, DAY COUNT:
e
ens
to
Slide 79
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
Student Notes
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
The Day Formula Element
c
io tude
r
a
t
Following are important points about
n theisdaySformula:
o
h element.
ttake
e@for seach
A day formula is required
h
e
u
ahthe day formula
r
a
The system
uses
to evaluate each day of the absence event to determine the number of
(s
e
hours,
days, or other units the absence represents.
H
h
a
r
result of the day formula is the number of absence units, for example, 1 if the units are days or 0, 0.5, 4,
Sa The
or 8 if the units are hours.
The value returned by the day formula populates the system element DAY COUNT.
Note. Do not be misled by the word day in day formula; the information is stored in whatever units that you
use to calculate absences, for example, days or hours.
112
Lesson 6
The Day Formula (continued)

This diagram shows how the system uses the DAY COUNT value to determine the number of paid and
unpaid units:
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
Slide 80
tr
n
Student Notes
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
Additional Information About the Day Formula
c
io tude
r
a
t
Following are additional points about
n theisdaySformula:
o
h system compares the day count to the entitlement balance to
tthe
e@
For the day that is being
processed,
h
e
s
u be paid.
establish whether
ahthe units can
r
a
(s
Paideunits populate the system element DAY COUNT PD; unpaid units populate the system element, DAY
H
COUNT UNP.
h
a
r
Sa If the entitlement balance is insufficient, the system checks for instructions that you've defined for negative
balances.
Example: Defining Rules for Negative Balances

This is an example of the page that you use to define rules for negative balances.
Options are: Take as Unpaid Time, Allow Negative Balance, and Take with Other Absence.
113
Lesson 6
See Also
Lesson 20: Implementing Absence Take Features, Defining Qualifying Periods for Using Entitlement
Lesson 20: Implementing Absence Take Features, Defining Rules for Negative Entitlement Balances
e
ens
ra
li
e
l
b
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
114
(s
e
H
to
Lesson 6
Defining Rules for Overlapping Absences

Use the Absence Takes - Priority page to define what happens when absence events with overlapping dates
are entered for a payee.
You can:
Have the system process overlapping events for certain take elements.
Identify the priority of absence takes if overlapping events are entered.
e
ens
Events with lower priority are processed only for those days that do not overlap.
to
Slide 81
Student Notes
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
Page Used to Define Rules for Overlapping Absences
a
s uide
a
h
Use this page to enter instructions for overlapping
events:
G
a) absence
t
c
n
e
o
ari Stud
t
Page Name
Navigation
n
o his
@
t
e
h
Priority
Set
up HRMS, Product Related, Global Payroll & Absence Mgmt, Elements,
e
s
uAbsence Elements, Absence Takes, Priority
ah
r
a
(s
e
H
h
a
r
Sa
Note. The higher the priority of an element, the lower the number you should enter in the Event Priority field.
Examples: How Rules Affect Overlapping Absences

Assume the following Absence take elements and properties are defined:
115
Lesson 6
Take Element
Event Priority
Duplicates Allowed?
E1
Yes, with E3
E2
No
E3
No
This table shows how the system will process overlapping absences:
Take
Absence Events
Dates Processed
Explanation
E2
February 10 - 15
February 10 - 12
E1
February 13 - 20
February 13 - 20
E1 has greater priority

because of the lower
priority number.
E1
February 10 - 15
February 10 - 15
E3
February 13 - 20
February 13 - 20
February 10 - 15
E3
ra
Sa
116
(s
e
H
an
r
t
February 13 - 20
February 16n- 20
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
u
rah
E2
February 10 - 15
e
swith
E1 allows duplicates
n
e
c processed
E3, so bothliare
e
entirely.
bl
a
r
fe
to
E2 has greater priority

because of the lower
priority number. E3 take is
processed only for those
days that do not overlap.
Lesson 6
Describing Absence Setup Guidelines
Setup Guidelines and Dependencies

Consider the following guidelines and dependencies as you create absence take elements:
Several features require the use of formulas.
Entitlement and take elements are linked.
Take elements can have several interdependencies.
Use the same units for entitlements, adjustments, balances, and other absence-related values.
Slide 82
e
ens
to
Student Notes
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
eLesson 7, "Setting Up Supporting
At a minimum, you must define a day formula for thea
take
s definition.
d
i
h
u
Elements," lists other formulas that you may need) to create. G
a nt
c
o
ri tude
a
t
n Linked
o
Entitlement and Take Elements
are
sS
i
@
h
t
e syou
hdefined,
e specify which entitlement rules apply. If you define take elements before
When a take element

is
h
u
a
you define entitlement
elements, you will need to return to the Take pages in Correction mode to select the
ar
s
(
entitlement
elements.
e
H
rah
a
SDependencies Between Take Elements
Features that Use Formulas
Mapping out the relationships between take elements can help you reduce setup time. You establish
relationships between take elements when defining rules for:
Using entitlement that is associated with another take element after the original entitlement is depleted.
Generating absence data for a second take element.
Overlapping absence events.
Using the Same Units

Entitlement, adjustments, balances, and other absence-related values must be stated in the same units, whether
the units represent hours, days, or some other period of time.
117
Lesson 6
For example, if you express entitlement in days, make sure that any supporting elements that define
adjustments, balances, and other absence-related amounts also resolve to days. Also, the units that you use to
define absence elements should match the units that the users will enter when adjusting or overriding
entitlement. If payees are entitled to 10 sick days per year, and a user enters an adjustment of 1, the system
will interpret the adjustment as one day.
Defining Absence Elements After Implementation

Although you define most absence entitlements and take elements during implementation, you can create
additional absence elements at a later date.
As your business needs change, it is recommended that you create new absence elements rather than
modifying existing elements. Although you can change existing elements, doing so can affect retroactive
processing.
e
ens
ra
li
e
l
b
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
118
(s
e
H
to
Lesson 6
Activity 3: Creating an Absence Take Element

In this activity, you will review the activity overview and create a frequency-based absence take element.
Slide 83
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
(s
e
H
119
Lesson 6
Activity Overview
In this activity, you will create a frequency-based take element, called PTO Take. The effective date of the
element is January 1, 2010, the absence type is VAC (vacation), and the day formula is GP COUNT WORK
DAYS. Select the appropriate override level and link the take element to the PTO entitlement element that
you created in the last activity.
e
ens
ra
li
e
l
b
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
120
(s
e
H
to
Lesson 6
Creating a Frequency-based Take

To create a new frequency-based take for paid time off:
1. Select Set up HRMS, Product Related, Global Payroll & Absence Mgmt, Elements, Absence Elements,
Absence Takes.
3. Enter the following information:
Value or Status
Name
PTO Take
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
Override Level - Payee
Selected
a
s uide
a
h
4. Enter the following information on the Calculation
a) page:
tG
c
n
e
o
ri tud
a
t
n
Page Element
Value or Status
o his S
@
t
e se
Effective Date hh
January 1, 2010
u
a
r
(saType
Absence
VAC
e
H
h
ra
Sa
Page Element
e
ens
Description
PTO Take
Priority
10
Entitlement Element
PTO Ent
5. Enter the following information on the Day Formula page:

Page Element
Value or Status
Day Formula Element
GP COUNT WORK DAYS
6. Click the Save button.

7. Click OK when you see the warning about using one formula for all balance units.
121
Lesson 6
Review

Absence types and reasons help you categorize absences and track why employees are absent from work.
During take processing, the system evaluates an absence event and compares it to the entitlement balance.
For each day of a reported absence, the Day Formula determines whether the day represents an absent day.
You should consider the dependencies and guidelines for creating absence elements before you create these
elements.
Slide 84
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
Student Notes
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
This table lists additional resources that provide more details about
no the topics that we have discussed in this
lesson:
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
Topic
See
rio tude
a
t
nPeopleSoft
S Management 9.1 PeopleBook, "Defining Absence Elements,"
Absence takes
Absence
o
sAbsence
i
@
h
Defining
Take Elements
t
e se
h
h
u PeopleSoft Absence Management 9.1 PeopleBook, "Defining Absence Elements,"
areasons
r
Absence typesaand
(s
Defining Absence Types and Reasons
e
H
rah
Sa
122
Lesson 7
Setting Up Supporting Elements

Objectives
Describe system elements.
to
li
e
l
b
Create variable elements.

Describe date elements.
Define duration elements.
e
ens
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
Slide 86
ra
Sa
(s
e
H
123
Lesson 7
Objectives (continued)

Create formula elements.
Describe operators used in formulas.
Explain elements used to look up values.
Create brackets.
Slide 87
e
ens
ra
li
e
l
b
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
124
(s
e
H
to
Lesson 7
Describing System Elements
Supporting Elements
You can use supporting elements, including those shown in this diagram, to create more complex elements:
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
Slide 88
ra
Sa
(s
e
H
125
Lesson 7
Describing System Elements (continued)
System Elements
The following diagram illustrates that system elements are a type of supporting element:
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
Slide 89
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
(s
e
HNotes
Student
h
a
r
Sa
Types of System Elements

System elements store data that you can use in your rules. They are Delivered and maintained by PeopleSoft
and cannot be added to your system. They are also populated automatically when you run a process.
There are two types of system elements:
Database system elements come from a predefined list of database records and fields, specifically from
Human Resources.
Examples: Payee record information, such as Personal Data and Job, are retrieved by database system
elements.
System-computed elements come from internally stored data and are not physical database fields.
Examples: Other information that is important to calculations, such as Period Begin and End Dates and
Scheduled Hours each day, are retrieved by system-computed system elements.
126
Lesson 7
Pages Used to View System Elements

Use these pages to view system elements.
Use this page to view a system element by source, and to view the record and field that populates a database
system element:
Page Name
Navigation
View System Elements by

Source
Supporting Elements, View System Elements by Source, View System Elements
by Source
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
(s
e
H
127
Lesson 7
Use this page to view a system element:

Page Name
Navigation
Source and Use
Supporting Elements, System Elements, Source and Use
e
ens
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
ra
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
Use this page to view a system element's description:
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
nNavigation
Page Name
o
sS
i
@
h
t
he usSet
e Up HRMS, Product Related, Global Payroll & Absence Mgmt, Elements,
System Elementsh
- Comments
a
Supporting Elements, System Elements, System Element Name
ar
s
(
e
Click the Comments link at the bottom of the System Element Name page.
H
h
Sa
128
to
Lesson 7
Creating Variable Elements
Variables
Variable elements can hold a value for use in another element, including dates, numbers, characters, and
redirection to another element.
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
Slide 90
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
(s
e
H
h
Student
ara Notes
Variables
Variable elements can hold a value for use in another element, such as:
Dates, numbers (decimals or monetary), characters, or "point" to another element.
A value for comparison or testing to calculate another element.
Limits or other predefined values.
Page Used to Define Variable Elements

Use this page to define the value of a variable:
129
Lesson 7
Page Name
Navigation
Variables - Definition
Supporting Elements, Variables, Definition
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
era
f
s
Note. The field format that you select on the Variable Name page determines
nthe type of value that you can
a
r
t
enter on the Variables - Definition page.
onn
a de
s
a
h Gui
)
Example: Using Variables
a
c dent
o
i
r
You might define the value of an absence-based
in a variable because you have a business need to
uentitlement
a ForSexample,
t
t
n
override the entitlement at different
levels.
you
might need to override the entitlement amount
o his
@
by pay group.
t
he use
h
ra
a
s
Page Usede
to(Update Variable Elements by Category
H
rahUse this page to update the values of multiple variables at the same time:
a
S
130
Lesson 7
Page Name
Navigation
Variables by Category
Supporting Elements, Variables by Category, Variables by Category
to
e
ens
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
Note. This page is useful when you have assigned each variable
When you access the page, you
naocategory.
select the category of variables that you want to update. a

s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
u
ah
r
a
(s
e
H
h
a
r
Sa
131
Lesson 7
Describing Date Elements
Date Elements
Use date elements to specify dates, determine a date or extract part of a date.
e
ens
ra
li
e
l
b
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
Slide 91
(s
e
HNotes
Student
h
a
r
Sa
Date Elements
Use date elements to:

Determine a new date by adding or subtracting from a given start date.
Specify dates in formulas, durations, and other elements.
Extract part of a datesuch as the day, month, or yearfor use in other elements.
Pages Used to Define Date Elements

Use these pages to define date elements.
132
to
Lesson 7
Use this page to define a date or to calculate a new date based on an existing date:
Page Name
Navigation
Dates - Definition
Supporting Elements, Dates, Definition
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
(s
e
H
this page to assign a unique identifier to each of the elements entered in the Definition page, so that the
rah Use
a
year, month, and day values can be reused, individually, or in combination:
S
Page Name
Navigation
Dates - Extract
Supporting Elements, Dates, Extract
133
Lesson 7
Example: Returning the Last Day of the Month
If you select Return Last Day of the Month on the Definition page, and the date resolves to March 22, 2005,
the system would return March 31, 2005, the last day of the month.
Example: Using the Extract Page

Suppose your organization has a policy that says that employees with at least three years of service are
entitled to seniority days. Seniority days are calculated during the anniversary month of the hire date.
For the absence entitlement rule, you would use two date elements using the extract field option to determine
whether the current month that is processed is the hire date month.
Two variables must be created (HIRE MONTH and CURR MONTH). The variables retrieve the value of the
month extracted from the two date elements, one using the HIRE DATE system element and the other using
the PERIOD END DATE system element. In a formula, you compare the variables' values. If they match (and
the payee has more than three years of service) seniority days are allotted to the payee.
e
ens
ra
li
e
l
b
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
134
(s
e
H
to
Lesson 7
Defining Duration Elements
Duration Elements
Duration elements calculate the period of time between two dates by subtracting one date from another.
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
Slide 92
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
(s
e
HNotes
Student
h
a
r
Sa
Common Characteristics of Duration Elements

Here are the common characteristics of duration elements:
A duration element always resolves to a number.
You can exclude periods of time from a duration, or include only certain periods, based on Human
Resources status codes or absence days.
Results of durations can be rounded.
Creating a Duration Element

To create duration elements, you define:
From and to dates.
How the duration is calculated (years, months, or days).
135
Lesson 7
Rounding rules.
Whether to include or exclude absence days in the calculation.
Whether to include or exclude periods based on Human Resources status codes.
Page Used to Define Duration Elements

Use this page to define the calculation period for a duration element:
Page Name
Navigation
Durations - Definition
Supporting Elements, Durations, Definition
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
(s
e
H
Calculating Duration
The calculation for the duration includes both the Date From and Date To dates if you select the Include From
and To Date check box; otherwise the calculation only includes the Date From date.
To resolve a duration element, the system does the following:
Resolves Date From.
Resolves Date To.
Calculates duration.
Rounds (if selected).
Returns the duration with decimals (if selected).
136
Lesson 7
Defining Duration Elements (continued)
Using HR Status to Include or Exclude Periods

You can include or exclude periods of time from a duration calculation based on:
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
Slide 93
tr
n
no
Student Notes
a
s uide
a
h
a)a Duration
tG
c
n
Including or Excluding Periods of Time

from
e
o
i tud
artime
t
You can include or exclude periods
of
from
n
S a duration calculation based on:
o
s
i
th or Suspended.
e@ seas Active
h
A payee's HR status
code, such
u
ah
r
a
For example,
(s you can include only the periods of time that the payee was active.
e
H
The length of time during which a particular status code was in effect.
h
a
r
Sa For example, include periods of time that the payee was suspended, if the payee was in that status for less
than one month.
Page Used to Define HR Status Codes to Include or Exclude

Use this page to include or exclude time periods from a duration calculation based on Human Resources
status codes:
137
Lesson 7
Page Name
Navigation
Set Daily HR Status Criteria
Supporting Elements, Durations
Click the Set Daily HR Status Criteria link on the Durations - Definition page. This
link appears only when the return value is set to Days.
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
Note. The code combinations
that
@ youthenter are, as a group, either included or excluded. When you include
e
h
eout are automatically excluded.
specific codes, those
that youuleave
s
h
a
ar
s
(
e
H
Howathe
r h System Interprets From and To Dates
a
S If you include or exclude periods of time from a duration based on Human Resources status codes, the
following rules apply:
If the Date From value is earlier than the payee's first effective-dated PS_JOB row, it defaults to the earliest
effective-dated PS_JOB row for the employee ID and employee record number combination.
For example, you define a duration with a Date From value of January 1, 2000 and instruct the system to
include days that they payee was active. If a payee was hired and becomes active on January 7, the system
uses January 7 as the Date From date, not January 1.
If the Date To value is greater than the calendar period end date, it defaults to the period end date.
The system does not issue a warning or error when it uses the default dates.
Example: Using Additional Qualifiers for Including or Excluding Time

You can use additional qualifiers to further define inclusion or exclusion. If you select the If Each Sub-Period
check box, the Operand, Value and Period fields become available.
138
Lesson 7
Suppose that you define a duration with the following from and to dates: June 23, 2011 to September 23,
2011. You want to include only those periods during which an employee is active for more than five days, so
you define a sub-period that stipulates: Included if the Pay Status is Active; If each Sub-Period > 5 days.
Now, say that the payee has the following PS_JOB rows.
Status
Effective Date
Sequence
Active
June 23, 2011
Suspended
July 1, 2011
Active
August 1, 2011
Terminated
August 10, 2011
e
ens
to
The duration resolves to 8 days (first active period) plus 9 days (second active period), to arrive at a value of
17 days. Both active periods are included because each exceeds 5 days.
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
(s
e
H
139
Lesson 7
Defining Duration Elements (continued)
Rounding Example
This table shows the effect of various rounding options on a duration element's resolved value. The Date
From is Jan 1, 2010; the Date To is Jan 31, 2012:
Return Duration In
Add 1 Year if
Months >=
Add 1 Month if Days

>=
Return Duration
With Decimals
Value
Years
No
No
Yes
2.083333
Years
No
No
No
2.000000
Years
Yes, 1
No
No
Months
No
No
Yes
Months
No
Yes, 15
Return Duration In
Months >=
>=
With Decimals
Value
Days
No
No
No (Inclusive = No)
761.000000
Days
No
No
No (Inclusive = Yes)
762.000000
li
e
l
b
2.000000
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
No
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
Slide 94
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
Student Notes
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
ah about uthe Example

Additional Information
r
a
(s table provides some additional examples:
The following
e
H
h
a
r
Add 1 Year if
Add 1 Month if Days Return Duration
Sa
The standard field size is 12.6; so all values are shown to the full six decimal places.
140
e
ens
25.000000
25.000000
to
Lesson 7
Activity 4: Creating a Duration Element to Determine Years

of Service
Update system elements to store results.
Define a duration element.
Slide 95
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
(s
e
H
141
Lesson 7
Activity Overview
In this activity, you will update two system elements, HIRE DATE and PERIOD END DATE to store the
results. You will then create a duration element called Yrs of Service that calculates the years of service
between the time a payee was hired and the end of the current absence period. This will be used in an
upcoming activity when you create a floating holiday entitlement based in a payee's years of service
When defining the element, use an effective date of January 1, 2010, and instruct the system to store results,
even if zero. Use the system element, HIRE DATE, to define the duration's begin date and PERIOD END
DATE to define the duration's end date.
e
ens
ra
li
e
l
b
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
142
(s
e
H
to
Lesson 7
Updating System Elements

To update the system elements:
1. Select Setup HRMS, Product Related, Global Payroll & Absence Mgmt, Elements, Supporting Elements,
System Elements.
2. Find the element named HIRE DATE.
3. On the System Element Name page, select the Store check box in the Results group box.
e
ens
4. Click Save.
to
li
e
l
b
5. Click the Return to Search button.
ra
fe
s
n
a
6. Repeat steps two, three, and four, using the PERIOD END DATE system element.
tr
n
Defining a Duration Element
no
a
s uide
a
To define a duration element to calculate years of service:
h
)
a
t&GAbsence Mgmt, Elements, Supporting Elements,
c
n
1. Select Set Up HRMS, Product Related,

Global
Payroll
e
o
Durations.
ari Stud
t
n
o his
@
2. Click the Add a NeweValue
tab. t
h
e
s
h
u
a
r
3. Enter thea
following
information on the Duration Name page:
s
(
e
H
Value or Status
rah Page Element
a
S
Name
Yrs of Service
Description
Years of Service
Store
Selected
Store if Zero
Selected
143
Lesson 7
4. Enter the following information on the Definition page:

Page Element
Value or Status
Effective Date
January 1, 2010
Date From Type
SystemElem
Date From
HIRE DATE
Date To Type
SystemElem
Date To
PERIOD END DATE.
5. Click the Save button.
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
144
(s
e
H
e
ens
to
Lesson 7
Creating Formula Elements
Formula Elements
Formulas offer a convenient way to implement various absence management features. Create different
formulas or use the same formula in as many situations as you need.
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
Slide 96
(s
e
H
Student
ara Notes
Commonly Used Absence Formulas

This table provides a summary of commonly used absence formulas:
145
Lesson 7
Formula
Use
Per Absence Formula

Element
Required for absence-based entitlement

elements. Defines when to resolve
entitlement.
Element
Populated
Value Returned
0 = do not resolve
entitlement.
Nonzero value =
resolve entitlement.
Resolved each day if the balance is

needed during processing.
Day Formula
Required for all take elements. Interprets

each absent day and returns the units to
compare to the entitlement balance.
DAY COUNT
Count that represents

units for the absent day.
Always resolved per day.

Offset Formula
Conditional Formula
Per-absence entitlements only.

Automatically reduces beginning
entitlement balance.
Count that can be added

to or subtracted from
the entitlement balance.
Resolved immediately after a per-absence

entitlement is resolved.
li
e
l
b
Defines conditions for generating an

absence event for another take element.
Entry page.
Resolved for each day of an absence

event. The system saves only the value
that is resolved for the last day of the
absence.
146
to
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no WAIT COUNT
a
(Wait) Count Formula
Returns the number of remaining days
s a waituide
a
that a payee must be absenth
before
period is satisfied. a)
tG
c
n
e
o
i that tisuused
Often the formula
d for the
aisrthe
t
Wait Count
same
as
the formula
n
S Formula.
o
s
i
that
is
used
for
the
Day
For
@
h
t
e
example,workdaycould
be
counted.
h
e
s
h
u
a
r
Forecast Element
Used during the Forecasting process to
ABS EVT FCST
(sa
e
evaluate
an
absence.
The
result
of
the
VAL
H
h
formula
appears
on
the
Absence
Event
ra
Sa
e
ens
Zero or nonzero value.
Count
Up to 30 alphanumeric
characters.
Lesson 7
Creating Formula Elements (continued)
Defining a Formula
To define a formula:
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
Slide 97
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
Student Notes
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
Pages Used to Define Formulas

rio tude
a
t
n is S
Use these pages to define formulas.
o
e@ se th
h
u
ah
r
a
(s
e
H
h
a
r
Sa
147
Lesson 7
Use this page to define formulas used in calculations:

Page Name
Navigation
Field-by-Field Definition
Supporting Elements, Formulas, Field-by-Field Definition
e
ens
ra
li
e
l
b
fe
s
n
a
ra
Sa
148
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
e region:
The following fields are part of theaField-by-Field
rio tudarea
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
u
ah
r
a
(s
e
H
to
Lesson 7
Function
Select the type of function or qualifier for the formula: And, Average, Else,
Endif, Exit, If, In, Max, Min, Or, Sum, and Then.
( (left parenthesis) and )

(right parenthesis)
Use parentheses to group your formula calculations. If you enter a left

parenthesis you must enter a right parenthesis. The groupings you use can affect
the calculation sequence. To enter multiple sets of parentheses you must use
multiple lines.
Entry Type 1 and Entry Select the entry type for the operation. You should only enter non-operator
functions in the Entry Type 2 field. Otherwise, your formula will probably not
Type 2
work correctly, and may not cause a validation error to alert you as to the
location of the error.
Element 1 or 2, Calendar Enter the element name or value. The field that you use depends on the selected
Date 1 or 2, Character entry type.
Value 1 or 2, and
Important! If you select an Entry Type of Calendar Date, Character, or
Numeric Value 1 or 2
Numeric and then attempt to enter the corresponding value in the Element 1 or
Element 2 field, the system generates a parenthesis error that you can only
correct by deleting every row in the formula and then adding them back one at a
time, saving each row.
to
e
ens
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
Sa
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
To assign the resolved
value
of the formula to an element, select the entry type
Entry Type 3
)
G
a
t
and element name.
To
assign
the resolved value to the element that you are
c
n
e
o
i the tformula
d definition before you select the formula name.
defining,
u
arsave
t
n
o his S
@
t
ea rounding
h
e
Use this page to assign
rule, previous period rule, or element pointer selection to a field that you
s
ahformula: u
are using in your
r
a
(s
e
H
Navigation
h
a
r Page Name
Operator
Select the operation to perform. The following standard operators are available:
(none), -, *, /, +, <, <=, <>, =, >, and >=.
Element Name < > Attributes
Click the Element Attributes icon next to an element name on the Field-by-Field
Definition page.
Note. If you enter information on this page, the system automatically selects the check box to the right of
the entry type on the Field-by-Field Definition page.
149
Lesson 7
Validating Formulas
Validating a formula:
e
ens
to
Slide 98
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
Validating a Formula
h
a) nt G
c
You must validate your formula beforeryou

io cantuse
dit.e
u
a
t
n is S the formula, an error message informs you that the formula
If you run the absence process o
without validating
must be validated. he@ e th
s
h
u
a
r
Click the Validate
(sa button on the Field-by-Field Definition page to validate a formula.
e
H
h
a
r
Sa
Student Notes
150
Lesson 7
Viewing Formulas
The Text Definition page enables you to:
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
Slide 99
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
Student Notes
a
s uide
a
h
)
a
tG
c
n
Page Used to View Formulas

e
o
ri tud
a
t
n
S on the Field-by-Field Definition page:
Use this page to view the formula
o that hyouiscreated
@
t
he use
h
ra
a
s
e(
H
rah
a
S
151
Lesson 7
Page Name
Navigation
Text Definition
Supporting Elements, Formulas, Text Definition
e
ens
ra
li
e
l
b
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
152
(s
e
H
to
Lesson 7
Describing Operators Used in Formulas
Operator Types
The system supports these operator types:
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
Slide 100
h
a) nt G
c
Student Notes
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
Examples of Operators
u
ah
r
a
This table(s
describes each type of operator:
e
H
h
a
r
Sa
153
Lesson 7
Operator
Example
Arithmetic
Four binary arithmetic operators can be used in arithmetic

expressions:
+ (Addition)
- (Subtraction)
* (Multiplication)
/ (Division)
Relational
Relational operators are always used with an

If...Then...statement.
A relational condition causes comparison of two operands.
A relational condition is true if the relation exists between
the operands.
< (less than)
Boolean
ra
Sa
to
li
e
l
b
The relational operators are:
> (greater than)
e
ens
ra
fe
s
n
a
(s
e
H
tr
n
= (equal
noto)
a
e or equal to)
s >= (greater
dthan
a
i
h
u
a) n t<=G(Less than or equal to)
c
rio tude <> (Not equal to)

a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
Combining simple conditions forms a Boolean condition.
u
ara
You can create combined conditions and complex
conditions with the following logical connectors:
AND
Logical conjunction; the value is true if both of the
conditions are true, and false if one or both of the
conditions are false.
OR
Logical inclusive; the value is true if one or both of the
conditions are true, and false if both conditions are
false.
Assignment
The assignment operator is represented by the symbol,

>>.
To assign one value to another, complete the Assign to
Type field and the Assign to Element field.
154
Lesson 7
Using Parentheses in Arithmetic Expressions
Parentheses can be used in arithmetic expressions to specify the order in which elements are to be evaluated.
Expressions within parentheses are evaluated first. Within nested parentheses, evaluation proceeds from the
least inclusive set to the most inclusive set. When parentheses are not used, the following hierarchal order of
execution is implied-multiplication and division then addition and subtraction.
How Boolean Operators are Used

The general syntax of Boolean operators is:
Condition {AND/OR} Condition ...
The condition may be a simple condition, a combined condition, or one of the combinations showed in the
following table:
to
e
s
n
Permitted Location in
Element can be preceded
Element can be
efollowed
Element
Conditional Expression
by only...
by only... lic
le
b
a
Simple Condition
Any
OR, AND, (
erOR, AND, )
f
s
an
r
t
OR or AND
Not first or last
Simple conditions,
Simple condition, (
on )
n
a
s
(
Not last
OR, AND,i(de
Simple condition, (
a
h
u
)
a nSimple
t Gconditions, )
c
)
Not last
OR, AND, )
e
o
ri tud
a
t
S either AND or OR (but not both) are used exclusively in a
onbe used
swhen
Although parentheses need@
never
i
h
t
combined condition. Parentheses
he uscan
e be used to affect a final truth value when a mixture of AND and NOT is
h
used.
a
ar
s
(
e
H
h
ra
Examples: Assignment Operators
Sa
Following are examples of assignments:
155
Lesson 7
/* Numeric Assignments */
GP TEM001 NUM + 5 >> K0FM FORMULA NUM
100.00 >> K0FM FORMULA NUM
200.00 >> K0FM FORMULA NUM
/* Character Assignments */
"TEXT" >> K0FM FORMULA CHR
GP TEM001 CHR >> K0FM FORMULA CHR
/* Date Assignments */
"01-01-1990" >> K0FM FORMULA DT
GP TEM001 DATE >> K0FM FORMULA DT
GP TEM001 DT >> K0FM FORMULA DT
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
156
(s
e
H
e
ens
to
Lesson 7
Activity 5: Defining a Formula

In this activity, you will review the activity overview and define a formula.
Slide 101
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
(s
e
H
157
Lesson 7
Activity Overview
When you defined the absence take element PTO Take, you used GP COUNT WORK DAYS as the day
formula.
In this activity, you will create a day formula called Day Count that takes holidays into account. The formula
should always be recalculated and has an effective date of January 1, 2010.
e
ens
ra
li
e
l
b
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
158
(s
e
H
to
Lesson 7
Creating a Day Formula

To define a day count formula that recognizes holidays:
1. Select Set Up HRMS, Product Related, Global Payroll & Absence Mgmt, Elements, Supporting Elements,
Formulas.
2. Click the Add a New Value tab.
3. Enter, the following information on the Formula Name page:
Page Element
to
li
e
l
b
era
f
s
Description
Day Count Formula
an
r
t
on
n
Field Format
Decimal
a de
s
a
h Selected
ui
)
Always Recalculate
G
a
c dent
o
i
r
4. On the Field-by-Field Definition
ntapage,isenter
Stuan effective date of January 1, 2010.
o
h later instruct the system to assign the resolved value to the formula
e@
5. Click the Save button,
so that e
youtcan
h
s
h
that you are a
creating.
u
r
a
s following information in the Field-by-Field Area:
(the
6. Enter
e
hH
ra
Sa
Value or Status
e
ens
Name
Day Count FM
Page Element
Value or Status
Function
If
Entry Type 1
System Element
Element 1
SCHED HRS
Operator
>
Entry Type 2
Numeric
Numeric Value 2
7. Click the Add a New Row button in the Field-by-Field Area.
159
Lesson 7
8. For Sequence Number 2, enter the following information in the Field-by-Field Area:
Page Element
Value or Status
Function
And
Entry Type 1
System Element
Element 1
HOLIDAY TYPE
Operator
<>
Entry Type 2
Character
Character Value 2
Do Not Enter any Data
ra 11. Click the Add a New Row button in the Field-by-Field Area.
Sa
Page Element
Value or Status
Function
Else
Entry Type 2
Numeric
Numeric Value 2
Assign to Type
Formula
Assign to Element
DAY COUNT FM
160
li
e
l
rab
e
f
s
n
a
r
Page Element
Value or Status
-t
n
o
n
a
Function
Then
s uide
a
h
G
a) ntNumeric
Entry Type 2
c
e
o
ari Stud 1
t
Numeric Value 2
n
o his
@
t
e
e
Assign to Typehh
Formula
s
u
a
r
(stoaElement
Assign
DAY COUNT FM
e
H
h
e
ens
to
Lesson 7
14. For Sequence Number 5:

In the Function field, select Endif.
15. Click the Validate button
16. Click Save.

17. Access the Text Definition page and compare the formula to the example shown in the following Result
section.
Results
Your formula should look like this:
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
(s
e
H
rah
a
SThis concludes the activity. Please do not continue.
161
Lesson 7
Explaining Elements Used to Look Up Values
Using Look-Up Tables

The system enables you to use Array elements and Bracket elements to look up data.
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
Slide 102
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
(s
e
H
Student
h Notes
ra
Sa
Comparing Array and Bracket Elements

This table provides a brief description of array and bracket elements:
162
Element
Description
Array
Used to look up values stored outside Absence

Management that are not delivered by system elements.
They do not resolve to a value but instead invoke
processing.
Bracket
Used to look up values stored in Absence Management by

looking up a row based on the key values and returning a
bracket value.
Lesson 7
Explaining Elements Used to Look Up Values (continued)
Explaining Arrays
Array elements use SQL statements to retrieve data.
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
Slide 103
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
(s
e
HNotes
Student
h
a
r
Sa
Types of Data Retrieved by Arrays

Array elements use SQL statements to retrieve the following types of data:
Any field in the database that is not already retrieved by system elements.
Data from tables as well as views.
Example of Array Use

You can use arrays to retrieve data in the Benefits tables or the Company table in Human Resources for use in
Absence Management rules.
163
Lesson 7
Explaining Elements Used to Look Up Values (continued)
Explaining Brackets
Brackets enable you to create simple lookup tables. Brackets are also called bands and lookup tables.
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
Slide 104
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
(s
e
HNotes
Student
h
a
r
Sa
Common Characteristics of Brackets

Bracket elements have the following characteristics:
You can create simple look-up tables.
For defined tables, the system uses rules to find the correct row and returns the bracket value.
Use the results in formulas, entitlements, variables, dates, and durations.
Example: Using a Bracket to Look Up Entitlement

For example, suppose you are building a bracket that will let you look up vacation entitlement based on years
of service. To perform the look-up, the system must know the entitlement amounts that correspond to the
years of service.
You enter the entitlement amounts in your bracket look-up table. To get years of service, you define a
duration element that calculates the duration from the payee's hire date to the period end date.
164
Lesson 7
Creating Brackets
Bracket Setup
To create a bracket element:
e
ens
Slide 105
to
Student Notes
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
o you define a bracket.
nbefore
Identify the building blocks associated with your lookup needs
a
e
s
d
a
i
h Gu
)
a
c dent
o
i
r
nta is Stu
o
e@ se th
h
u
ah
r
a
(s
e
H
h
a
r
Planning Brackets
Sa
165
Lesson 7
Creating Brackets (continued)
Defining Lookup Rules

You can define the actions that the system takes in the following circumstances:
What happens if the system does not find a match: generate an error or continue processing.
What happens if the key values are over or under those defined on the table.
What values to return if the system does not find an exact match.
Whether to take the lowest or highest option that matches (depending on the interpolation method).
Slide 106
Student Notes
ra
166
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
Use this page to define the lookup rules for the bracket:
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
Page Name
Navigation
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
Lookup Rules
Set
Up HRMS,
Product Related, Global Payroll & Absence Mgmt, Elements,
@ Supporting
h Elements,
t
e
Brackets, Lookup Rules
h
e
s
h
u
a
ar
s
(
e
H
h
Page Used to Define Lookup Rules
Sa
e
ens
to
Lesson 7
Examples
We will review three examples of brackets to illustrate these features:
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
Slide 107
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
Student Notes
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
Example 1: Interpolation
u
ah
r
a
(s we look at how interpolation is used in a bracket.
In this example,
e
H
h
Assume
that you are trying to calculate entitlement days using interpolation for years of service with key
a
r
Sa values of 5 and 10 years. The column values are as follows:
Search Keys (Years of Service)
Return Column (Number of Days)
10
If the lookup value is 7 years, and you tell the system to use:
Linear - the system uses a mathematical formula to calculate the value.
Use Nearest - the system chooses the nearest search key of 5 years and returns 3 days because 5 years is
closer to 7 years than to 10 years.
Use Next Higher - the system chooses the next highest search key of 10 years and returns 6 days.
Use Next Lower - the system chooses 5 years and 3 days.
Use No Interpolation - the system returns no value.
167
Lesson 7
Example 2 - Lowest/Highest Option

In the second example, we look at how the lowest and highest option is used in a bracket.
Assume that Dept ABC is returned and years of service = 6. The interpolation method is Use Next Higher and
the Use Lowest/Highest check box is selected.
Search Keys (Dept ID, Years of Service)
ABC 1
10
ABC 3
12
ABC 5
15
DEF 1
11
DEF 3
13
DEF 5
15
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
Example 3: Rounding Rules with Linear

de
rio Interpolation
u
a
t
t
n number
Say that entitlement is based onothe
worked during a quarter (QTD), and that you need to use
s ofShours
i
@
h
linear interpolation to determine
the
entitlement
value,
if a payee's hours don't match. You may then want to
t
e se
h
round the returna

column
h resultuto 0 decimal places.
r
a
(sdata is as follows:
The bracket
e
H
h
a
r
Sa Search Keys (Accumulator QTD Hours)
The next lower row for Dept ABC is for 5 years of service; there is no next higher row. Because there's no
exact match, the system uses the highest option of Dept ABC and Years of Service = 5.
200
300
500
Let's assume that a payee's QTD hours worked is 303.5. Using linear interpolation, the system would
normally return the following value:
(303.5 - 300) / (500 - 300) = 3.5/200 = 0.017500
The result would be the following:
2 + (0.017500 x (3-2)) = 2 + (0.017500 x 1) = 2 + 0.017500 = 2.017500
If you applied a rounding rule element to round up to 0 decimal places, the bracket return column would
equal 2.
168
Lesson 7
Defining Search Keys and Return Columns

Search keys have the following characteristics:
You can define up to five search keys
Each requires an element type and name
The keys are considered in the order entered
Return columns have the following characteristics
You can define up to eight return columns.
to
Define where to store the returned lookup values

Use the bracket as the first return column.
e
ens
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
Student Notes
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
Characteristics of Search Keysoand
n Return
S Columns
s
i
thin which they are entered on the bracket definition. The values are in
e@
Search keys are considered
in the e
order
h
s
h on keyuorder, when determining the order of rows from lowest to highest.
ascending order,
abased
r
a
(s
Returnecolumns define where to store the values returned by the lookup. You can use the bracket itself as the
H
return column.
h
a
r
Sa
Slide 108
Page Used to Define Search Keys and Return Columns

Use this page to indicate what you will use to search the lookup table:
169
Lesson 7
Page Name
Navigation
Search Keys/Return Columns
Supporting Elements, Brackets, Search Keys/Return Columns
e
ens
ra
li
e
l
b
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
170
(s
e
H
to
Lesson 7
Entering Bracket Data

Use the Bracket - Data page to define:
Lookup values.
The value returned for each lookup value.
Slide 109
Student Notes
e
ens
to
Page Used to Enter Bracket Data
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
Fields on the Bracket - Data page reflect the element names chosen on the Search Keys/Return Columns
page.
tr
n
novalues:
Use this page to enter lookup values for the search keys andareturn
e
s
d
a
i
h Gu
)
a
c dent
o
i
r
nta is Stu
o
e@ se th
h
u
ah
r
a
(s
e
hH
ra
Sa
171
Lesson 7
Page Name
Navigation
Data
Supporting Elements, Brackets, Data
e
ens
ra
li
e
l
b
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
172
(s
e
H
to
Lesson 7
Activity 6: Using a Bracket to Determine Entitlement


1. Create a bracket element.
2. Create an entitlement element.
3. Modify the associated take element.
Slide 110
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
(s
e
H
173
Lesson 7
Activity Overview
Payees are entitled to a number of floating holidays each year based on their years of service. In this activity,
you will define an entitlement element for floating holidays that uses the duration element, Yrs of Service, that
you created in activity 4.
Specifically, you will:
Create a bracket named Float Holidays to store the number of floating holidays that a person is entitled to
receive based on years of service.
Enter instructions to store the results and enter an effective date of January 1, 2010. For outside table limits,
use the first limit if under and use the last limit if over.
The search key is Yrs of Service. (The days are returned in the bracket itself, so it's not necessary to define a
return column for this information.) The bracket holds the following values:
Years of Service
Floating Holidays
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
ra
174
to
tr
n
no
a
s4 uide
3
a
h
)
a
tG
c
n
4
5
e
o
ari Stud
t
n
o his
5
6
@
t
e
h
e
snamed Float Ent that uses the bracket to determine the entitlement amount.
h element
u
a
Create an entitlement
r
sa
(
e
Select
override levels and enter an effective date of January 1, 2010. Specify an annual
H the appropriate
h frequency
and instruct the system to generate all accumulators.
2
Sa
e
ens
Associate the Float Ent entitlement element with PTO Take, assigning it a priority of 20.
Lesson 7
Creating a Bracket
To create a bracket to lookup the number of floating holidays:
Brackets.
3. Enter the following information on the Bracket Name page:
Value or Status
Name
Float Holidays
Use First Limit if Under
Selected
Use Last Limit if Over
Selected
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
Description
Floating Holidays
tra
n
no
Store
Selected
a
s uide
a
h
Store if Zero
G
a) ntSelected
c
e
o
i tud
arthe
t
on
Lookup
Rules page:
n
S
o
s
@ thi
e
h
e
Page Element h
Value or Status
s
u
a
r
(saDate
Effective
January 1, 2010
e
H
h
ra
Sa
Page Element
e
ens
5. Enter the following information on the Search Keys / Return Columns page:
Page Element
Value or Status
Search Key 1 Type
Duration
Element Name - Key 1
YRS OF SERVICE
(The days are returned in the bracket itself, so it's not necessary to define a return column for days.)
6. Access the Data page and click the Show All Columns icon (next to the Return Column 1-4 tab).
175
Lesson 7
7. Enter the following data, using the Add a New Row icon to insert a new row for each line of data:
Search Key
YRS OF SERVICE
Return Column
8. Click Save.
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
1. Select Set Up HRMS, Product Related, Global Payroll & Absence
Elements, Absence Elements,
no Mgmt,
a
e
as uid
h
)
a nt G
c
o
de
u
ari information:
t
t
3. Add an entitlement using the n
following
o his S
@
he use t
Page Element h
Value or Status
a
r
(sa
Name
Float Ent
e
H
h
To create an entitlement element for floating holidays:
ra
176
to
Creating an Entitlement Element
Sa
e
ens
Description
Floating Holiday Ent
Override Levels - Payee
Selected
Override Levels - Positive Inut
Selected
Lesson 7
4. Enter the following data on the Calculation page:

Page Element
Value or Status
Effective Date
January 1, 2010
Entitlement Type
Bracket
Entitlement Element
Float Holidays
Selected
Frequency ID
A (Annual)
5. Access the Auto Generated Accumulators page.

6. Click the Accumulator Periods link.
e
ens
to
ic
l
e
7. Enter the following information on the Accumulator Periods for Element FLOAT ENT
bl (Floating Holiday
a
r
Ent) page:
fe
s
n
tra
Page Element
Value or Status
n
no
a
s Selected
Entitlement
de
a
i
h
u
)
G
a
tSelected
c
n
Adjustment
e
o
ari Stud
t
n
o his
Paid Units
Selected
@
t
e
h use
h
a
8. Click the OK
button.
ar
s
(
e Save.
9. H
Click
h
ra
Sa
Modifying the PTO Take Element

To modify the PTO take element:
1. Select Set Up HRMS, Product Related, Global Payroll & Absence Mgmt, Elements, Absence Elements,
Absence Takes.
2. Select the Correct History check box.
3. Find the Element Name PTO Take.
4. Access the Calculation page.
5. Click the Add a New Row button in the Entitlement Member List.
177
Lesson 7
6. In the new row, enter the following information:

Page Element
Value or Status
Priority
20
Entitlement Element
Float Ent
7. Click Save.
8. Click OK when you see the warning about one formula used for all balances.
e
ens
ra
li
e
l
b
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
178
(s
e
H
to
Lesson 7
Review

You can use supporting elements, such as system elements, formulas, and variables to build other more
complex elements.
Variable elements can hold dates, numbers (decimal or monetary), characters, or point to another element.
You can use date elements to determine a new date by taking a starting date and adding or subtracting a
period of time.
A duration element can calculate the period of time between two dates.
Slide 111
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
(s
e
H
179
Lesson 7
Review (continued)

You can use formula elements to build simple and complex formulas.
Formula elements support arithmetic, relational, Boolean, and assignment operators.
An array element can retrieve any field in the database that is not already retrieved by system elements.
Bracket elements enable you to create simple lookup tables.
Slide 112
Student Notes
Setup Considerations for Formulas and Brackets
e
ens
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
Did you create all elements needed to create the formula a
or bracket?
s uide
a
h
Are the elements that you are looking up in Absence
a) Management?
tG
c
n
e
o
d other elements?
ri to usetwith
What supporting elements do you a
need
u
t
n
o his S
@
e se t
h
u
ah
r
a
This table(s
lists additional resources that provide more details about the topics that we have discussed in this
e
lesson:
H
h
a
r
Sa
Consider the following before defining supporting elements:
180
to
Lesson 7
Topic
See
Element types

Element Information," Categorizing Elements
System elements
PeopleSoft Enterprise Absence Management 9.1 PeopleBook, "Defining Data

Retrieval Elements," Working with System Elements
Variables

Calculation Elements," Defining Variable Elements
Dates

Calculation Elements," Defining Date Elements
Durations

Calculation Elements," Defining Duration Elements
se
n
Formulas and operators
e
ic
l
Calculation Elements," Defining Formula Elements
e
bl
a
r
Arrays
PeopleSoft Enterprise Absence Management 9.1 PeopleBook,
"Defining Data
sfe
Retrieval Elements," Working with Arraysan
tr
n
o
Brackets
PeopleSoft Enterprise Absencen
Management 9.1 PeopleBook, "Defining Data
a
e
Retrieval Elements," Defining
Brackets
s
d
a
i
h Gu
)
a
c dent
o
i
r
nta is Stu
o
e@ se th
h
u
ah
r
a
(s
e
hH
to
ra
Sa
181
ra
Sa
fe
s
n
a
ra
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
h
(s
e
H
li
e
l
b
e
ens
to
Lesson 8
Defining the Organizational Framework

Objectives
Describe the organizational framework.
to
li
e
l
b
Define element groups.

Define eligibility groups.
Define pay entities.
e
ens
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
Define pay groups.
no
a
s uide
a
Map pay groups.
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
Slide 114
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
u
ah
r
a
(s
e
H
h
a
r
Sa
183
Lesson 8
Describing the Organizational Framework
Organizational Framework
This diagram shows the organizational framework for absence processing:
e
ens
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
Slide 115
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
(s
e
H
Student
rah Notes
Sa
Components of the Organizational Framework

The organizational framework consists of:
Elements, which are the basic building blocks of your absence system and define the system's rules.
Element groups that identify absence take and absence entitlement elements for which payees might be
eligible.
Eligibility groups that identify one or more element groups for which payees might be eligible.
Pay groups that contain payees who share common pay characteristics.
Pay entities, which are typically the organizations that are responsible for making payments to payees.
184
to
Lesson 8
Describing the Organizational Framework (continued)
Framework Example
This diagram displays an example of an organizational framework:
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
Slide 116
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
(s
e
H
Student
rah Notes
Sa
Explanation of the Diagram

The diagram illustrates the following:
There are two groups of payees.
Weekly hourly.
Monthly salaried.
There are six entitlement elements.
Two elements (PTO accrued hourly and Sick accrued hourly) are available only to hourly employees.
Two elements (Study leave and Special leave) are available to all payees.
Two elements (PTO and Sick) are available only to salaried workers.
185
Lesson 8
Defining Element Groups
Defining Element Group Members

Element groups enable you to define a set of absence take and entitlement elements that are common to a
group of payees.
Elements in the group are assigned to payees in one of two ways:
e
ens
ra
li
e
l
b
tr
n
o
n
a
Student Notes
e
s
d
a
i
h Gu
)
a
c dent
o
i
Page Used to Define Element Group
Members
r
tu
ntamembers:
S
o
s
Use this page to define element
group
@ thi
e
h
e
s
h
u
a
ar
s
(
e
H
rah
a
S
fe
s
n
a
Slide 117
186
to
Lesson 8
Page Name
Navigation
Element Group Members
Element Groups, Element Group Members
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
Sa
ra
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
Specify therpurpose
element group. When defining an element group that is
Element Group Use
io tofuthe
destructure,
a
part of
the
organizational
select Eligibility or All Purpose.
t
n is S
o
h you are adding an absence entitlement element or an absence
twhether
e@
Designate
Element Type
h
e
s
u element.
take
ah
r
a
(s
e
Note. You do not need to assign earning and deduction elements to element
hH
groups for absence processing, even though these elements types can be selected
in the Element Type field.
187
Lesson 8
Defining Eligibility Groups
Creating Eligibility Groups

Some common characteristics of eligibility groups are:
e
ens
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
Slide 118
no
a
s uide
a
h
Student Notes
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
Page Used to Define EligibilityoGroups
th
e@ segroups:
h
Use this page to define
eligibility
u
ah
r
a
(s
Page e
Name
Navigation
H
rahEligibility Group
a
S
Organizational, Eligibility Groups, Eligibility Group
188
to
Lesson 8
Defining Pay Entities
Creating a Pay Entity

A pay entity is the highest level in the organizational framework and defines the organization managing
absences for payees.
Other purposes for a pay entity include:
Determine the elements to load for processing.
Only elements that are defined for use by all countries and those defined for a specific country that is equal
to the paying entity country, are loaded.
Identify various default processing values.
to
This includes limits for retro processing and calendar and fiscal year start dates.
Provide a calendar for accumulation periods.
e
ens
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
Slide 119
a
h
a) nt G
c
Student Notes
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
@ th
heEntities
e
Pages Used to DefinehPay
s
u
a
ar to define pay entities.
Use these(pages
s
e
H
rah
a
S
The accumulation periods for most accumulators are based on the pay entity's calendar or fiscal year.
189
Lesson 8
Use this page to set up the address of a pay entity:

Page Name
Navigation
Pay Entity Address
Organizational, Pay Entities, Pay Entity Address
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
ra
tr
n
Note. The system automatically displays the appropriate address
no fields for the country you select. You only
a
need to complete the information that applies to your organization's
s uidepay entity, as none of the fields are
a
h
required.
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
u
ah
r
a
(s
e
hH
Sa
190
Lesson 8
Use this page to define the processing details for a pay entity:
Page Name
Navigation
Processing Details
Organizational, Pay Entities, Processing Details
to
e
ens
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
(s
e
H
Note. Do not modify fields above the effective dated area of the page after implementation. Doing so can
destroy the integrity of retro and accumulator calculators.
191
Lesson 8
Defining Pay Groups
Creating Pay Groups

Absence Management uses pay groups to group individuals, and qualify them for absence processing. Each
pay group contains payees who share the same:
e
ens
ra
fe
s
n
a
Slide 120
ra
Sa
192
li
e
l
b
(s
e
H
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
to
Lesson 8
Defining Pay Groups (continued)
Creating Pay Groups (continued)

Pay groups that you create in Absence Management must correspond to pay groups that exist in your payroll
system.
For example, if your payroll system has these pay groups:
Payroll Pay Group
Members
ABC
Salaried employees who are paid monthly
XYZ
Hourly employees who are paid weekly.
e
ens
to
ic
l
e
l
bManagement.
You would set up corresponding pay groups for salaried and hourly payees in Absence
a
r
fe
s
n
Slide 121
tra
n
no
a
Student Notes
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
o ude
Pages Used to Define Pay Groupstari
n is St
o
Use these pages to define pay
@groups.th
e
h
e
s
h
u
a
ar
s
(
e
H
rah
a
S
193
Lesson 8
Use this page to define the pay group name:

Page Name
Navigation
Pay Group Name
Organizational, Pay Groups, Pay Group Name
e
ens
ra
li
e
l
b
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
194
(s
e
H
to
Lesson 8
Use this page to define pay group defaults:

Page Name
Navigation
Defaults
Organizational, Pay Groups, Defaults
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
(s
e
H
195
Lesson 8
Mapping Pay Groups
Mapping Process
After you define pay groups in Absence Management, map them to your payroll pay groups.
Mapping pay groups is required in order to:
e
ens
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
Student Notes
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
o ude
Page Used to Map Pay Groups tari
n is St
o
You can map more than one
pay group to the same payroll pay group.
@AbsencetManagement
h
e
h
e
s
hpay groups:
u
Use this page tora
map
(sa
e
H
h
a
r
Sa
Slide 122
196
to
Lesson 8
Page Name
Navigation
Absence Pay Group Mapping
Set Up HRMS, Product Related, Global Payroll & Absence Mgmt, Integration,
Absence Pay Group Mapping
Select the absence pay system (Payroll for North America or Payroll Interface).
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
(s
e
H
197
Lesson 8
Activity 7: Creating an Organizational Framework


1. Create elements groups for entitlements and takes.
2. Create an eligibility group for entitlements and takes.
3. Create a pay entity.
4. Create a pay group.
5. Map absence pay groups to payroll pay groups.
Slide 123
e
ens
ra
li
e
l
b
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
198
(s
e
H
to
Lesson 8
Activity Overview
This diagram illustrates the organizational framework that you will create for take and entitlement processing:
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
Sa
ra
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
e system that you are using in class. Your instructor

Note. Some values in this activity depend
ioon thetupayroll
d
r
a
t
will provide the exact values thatn
you need toS
enter.
o
s
i
e@ se th
h
u
ah
r
a
s groups for entitlement and take elements.
Create (elements
e
H an element group named Ent Grp with an effective date of January 1, 2010. Include PTO Ent and
h Create
Float Ent. These elements are to be assigned by eligibility group.
Create a second element group named Take Grp and include PTO Take.
Create an eligibility group for takes and entitlements.
Create an eligibility group named Elig Grp with an effective date of January 1, 2010. Include the two
element groups that you just created.
Create a pay entity.
Create an eligibility group named Pay Ent with an effective date of January 1, 2010. Use the country and
source bank values provided by your instructor.
Create a pay group.
Create a pay group named Pay Grp with an effective date of January 1, 2010. Associate the pay group with
the pay entity and the eligibility group that you created earlier. The exchange rate is OFFIC. Assign the
schedule (WRKSCH) that you created in lesson 3. This schedule is associated with the SHARE schedule
group. The holiday schedule is KU01.
Map the absence pay group to the payroll pay group specified by the instructor.
199
Lesson 8
Field Values for this Activity
Important! The values that you use to create pay entities and to map pay groups differ depending on whether
the class is using Payroll for North America or Payroll Interface.
Use the following table to determine the appropriate country code and source bank ID to use when creating a
pay entity; and the appropriate company and pay group to use when mapping absence pay groups to payroll
pay groups:
Payroll System
Country
Source Bank ID
Company
Paygroup
Payroll for North

America
USA
KU04
GBI
KLA
Payroll Interface
CYM
KU01
KLP
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
200
(s
e
H
li
e
l
b
KCY
e
ens
to
Lesson 8
Creating Element Groups for Entitlements and Takes

To create an element group for entitlement elements:
1. Select Set up HRMS, Product Related, Global Payroll & Absence Mgmt, Elements, Element Groups.
3. Enter the following information on the Element Group Name page:
Page Element
Value or Status
Name
Ent Grp
Description
Entitlement
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
5. Set the effective date to January 1, 2010.
s uide
a
h
ais )set to Eligibility.
tG
6. Confirm that the Element Group Use field
c
n
e
o
i tud
arthe
t
for
Element
n
S Group Members:
o
s
i
e@ se th
h
Page Element h
Value or Status
u
a
r
a
(s Type
Element
Abs Entitl
e
H
h
4. Access the Element Group Members page.
ra
Sa
Element Name
PTO Ent
Eligibility Assignment
By Eligibility Group
8. Add a row with the following information:

Page Element
Value or Status
Element Type
Abs Entitl
Element Name
Float Ent
9. Click Save.
To create an element group for take elements:
1. On the Element Group Members page, click the Add button.
201
Lesson 8
2. Enter the following information on the Element Group Name page:

Page Element
Value or Status
Name
Take Grp
Description
Takes

4. Set the effective date to January 1, 2010.
5. Confirm that the Element Group Use field is set to Eligibility.
6. Enter the following information for the Element Group Members:
Page Element
Value or Status
Element Type
Abs Take
Element Name
PTO Take
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
By Eligibility
no Group
a
e
s
d
a
i
h Gu
7. Click Save.
)
a
c dent
o
i
r
ta Stu
nEntitlements
o
Creating an Eligibility Group for
and Takes
is
@
h
t
e
e entitlements and takes:
hgroup uforsabsence
To create an eligibility
h
a
ar
1. Select(s
Set up HRMS, Product Related, Global Payroll & Absence Mgmt, Framework, Organizational,
e Groups.
Eligibility
H
rah2. Create a new eligibility group named Elig Grp.
a
S
3. Enter an effective date of January 1, 2010.
4. For the description enter Absence Elig Group.
5. Add the two new element groups: Ent Grp and Take Grp.
6. Click Save.
Creating a Pay Entity

To create a pay entity:
1. Select Set up HRMS, Product Related, Global Payroll & Absence Mgmt, Framework, Organizational, Pay
Entities.
2. Add a new pay entity called Pay Ent.
202
Lesson 8
3. Enter the following information on the Pay Entity Address page:

Page Element
Value or Status
Description
Pay Entity
Effective Date
January 1, 2010
Country
USA (For PNA)
(Choose the value for this field based on your Payroll

system. Use the information specified in the table of
field values in the Activity Overview.)
OR
CYM (For PI)
4. On the Processing Details page, enter the following information:

Page Element
Value or Status
Country
USA (For PNA)

CYM (For PI)
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
Source Bank ID
s KU04u(PNA)
de
a
i
h
)
(Choose the value for this field based on your a
Payroll
tORG
c
n
system. Use the information specified in

the
table
of
e
o
ari Stud KU01 (PI)
t
n
@o this
Currency Code he
USD
e
s
h
u
ara
s
5. Click(Save.
e
H
h
ara a Pay Group

SCreating
To create a pay group:

1. Select Set Up HRMS, Product Related, Global Payroll & Absence Mgmt, Framework, Organizational,
Pay Groups.
2. Add a pay group called Pay Grp.
203
Lesson 8
3. Enter the following information on the Pay Group Name page:

Page Element
Value or Status
Description
Pay group
Pay Entity
Pay Ent
Effective Date
January 1, 2010
Eligibility Group
Elig Grp
Exchange Rate Type
OFFIC
Schedule Group
SHARE
Schedule ID
WRKSCH
Holiday Schedule ID
KU01
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
Mapping Absence Pay Groups to Payroll Pay Groups
h
)
agroup:
tG
c
n
To map the absence pay group to a payroll

pay
e
o
ri tud
a
t
n
S Payroll & Absence Mgmt, Integration, Absence Pay Group
1. Select Set Up HRMS, Product
o Related,
sGlobal
i
@
h
Mapping.
t
he use
h
a select Payroll for North America or Payroll Interface, as advised by the instructor.
2. For the pay
rsystem,
a
s
e (the Search button.
3. H
Click
rah4. When the Absence Pay Group Mapping page appears, add a new effective-dated Pay Group Mapping
a
S
row.
4. Click Save.
5. Enter an effective date of January 1, 2010.
204
Lesson 8
6. Add a row to the Pay Group Information grid and enter the following information:
Grid Column Label
Value or Status
Absence Management
Pay Grp
Company
GBI (PNA)
(Choose the value for this field based

on your Payroll system. Use the
information specified in the table of
OR
Paygroup
KLA (PNA)
(Choose the value for this field based

on your Payroll system. Use the
information specified in the table of
OR
KCY (PI)
KLP (PI)
e
ens
to
7. Click Save.
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
(s
e
H
205
Lesson 8
Review

The organizational framework consists of elements, element groups, eligibility groups, pay groups, and pay
entities.
Element groups contain take and entitlement elements and make it convenient for different eligibility
groups to have elements in common.
Eligibility groups contain one or more element groups and define the absence entitlement and absence take
elements for which a payee might be eligible.
A pay entity defines various default options for the organizational framework.
A pay group defines a set of payees who share pay characteristics.
e
ens
li
e
l
b
Mapping absence pay groups to payroll pay groups is a prerequisite for sending absence results to your
payroll system.
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
Student Notes
a
h
a) nt G
c
de
rio tuFramework
a
Setup Considerations for the Organizational
t
n is S
o
Consider the following before
tuph the organizational framework:
e@setting
h
e
s
h want tougroup elements.
ayou
r
Figure out a
how
(s
e
Determine
the eligibility of elements.
H
h
a
r
Sa Determine the number of pay groups needed for your payees.
Slide 124
lesson:
206
to
Lesson 8
Topic
See
Organizational framework
PeopleSoft Enterprise Absence Management 9.1 PeopleBook, "Defining the

Organizational Structure," Understanding the Organizational Structure
Element groups

Organizational Structure," Defining Element Groups
Eligibility groups

Organizational Structure," Defining Eligibility Groups
Pay entities

Organizational Structure," Defining Pay Entities
Pay groups

Organizational Structure," Defining Pay Groups
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
(s
e
H
207
ra
Sa
fe
s
n
a
ra
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
h
(s
e
H
li
e
l
b
e
ens
to
Lesson 9
Defining the Processing Framework

Objectives
Describe the processing framework.
Define process lists.
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
Slide 126
to
li
e
l
b
Define sections.
ra
Sa
e
ens
(s
e
H
209
Lesson 9
Describing the Processing Framework
Processing Framework
This diagram shows the processing framework for Absence Management:
e
ens
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
Slide 127
a) nt G
c
io tude
r
a
t
Student Notes
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
u
ah
What is a Process
List?
r
a
(s include sections that identify the elements that the system should resolve during absence
e
Process
lists
H
h
processing.
a
r
Sa
210
to
Lesson 9
Describing the Processing Framework (continued)
Processing Framework Used in Course

This diagram shows the processing structure that we will create in this lesson:
e
ens
to
Slide 128
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
Processing Structure
a) nt G
c
e sections: one section for entitlement elements and

The process list that we will build in class
two
ioincludes
d
r
u
a
t
t
another section for take elements.n
o his S
@
e se t
h
u
ah
r
a
(s
e
H
h
a
r
Sa
Student Notes
211
Lesson 9
Defining Sections
Types of Sections
A section is a grouping of elements and controls the order that those elements are processed on the process
list.
You can define three types of sections for absence processing:
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
Slide 129
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
Student Notes
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
Purpose of Sections
e@ se th
h
ah sectionsu serve the following purposes:

In absence processing,
r
a
(s
e
Identify
H the elements for processing.
h
a
r
Sa Control the element processing order.
Organize process lists.
Break down process lists into manageable pieces
Sections control the processing order of individual elements, breaking down large process lists into
manageable pieces. Each section can have one or more individual elements. You can't add element groups to
a section and generally can't include sections in sections.
Using sections enables reuse of work. For example, if several processes use the same set of take elements,
you can create one section for takes and attach it to multiple process lists.
Sections are effective-datedduring processing, the system retrieves sections attached to the process list,
based on your calendar period end date.
Section Types
You can define three types of sections for absence processing:
212
Lesson 9
Section Type
When to Use
Standard
For regular processing. When you want the system to process elements in the exact
order that you specify on the process list.
Payee
When you need to specify, at the payee level, which elements should be processed and
in what sequence.
Absence Take
When you want the system to process absence takes in chronological order (rather than
sequence order).
Example: Difference Between Standard and Absence Take Sections

Suppose that you create a section for processing absence takes that includes two take elements with the
following sequence numbers:
Sequence
Element Name
10
Sick take
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
Sa
tr
n
no
a
Now, say that a payee has the following absences:
s uide
a
h
)
tG
March 3 to March 10 (work accident) ca
n
e
o
ari Stud
March 20 to March 24 (sick) nt
o his
@
e
If the section is a standard
section,
thet sick take is processed first because of its lower sequence number in the
h
e
s
section.
u
ah
r
a
(s
If the e
section is an absence take section, the work accident is processed first, because it occurred before the
Htime.
sick
h
a
r
20
Work Accident take
In some cases, this may be of no importance. However, when both absences share a common set of
entitlement units, the section type can make a significant difference. If using a standard section, the result
might not be what you intended.
213
Lesson 9
Defining Sections (continued)
Section Types
As illustrated in this diagram, the section type determines the types of elements that you can add to a section:
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
Slide 130
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
Student Notes
h
u
ah
r
a
e (s
DefiningH
Sections
rahSection type not only determines which elements you can include in a section-it also determines how the
a
S system processes elements within the section.
Note. If you add or delete an element from a section and later try to process a retroactive run, you might get
incorrect results. Before changing any of the elements in a section, assess the impact on retroactive
processing.
214
Lesson 9
Defining Sections (continued)
Defining Sections
To define a section you:
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
Slide 131
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
Student Notes
a
s uide
a
h
)
a
tG
c
n
Page Used to Add Elements to a Section

e
o
ri tud
a
t
n
Use this page to add elements to
oa section:
sS
i
@
h
t
he use
h
ra
a
s
e(
H
rah
a
S
215
Lesson 9
Page Name
Navigation
Sections - Definition
Processing, Sections, Definition
e
ens
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
Entering Calculation Instructions
n is S
o
h
e@box
If you select the Recalc
check
fort a given element, the system recalculates the element each time it
h
e
s
u even if the Always Recalculate option is not selected for the element on its
encounters it within
ahthe section,
r
a
element name
However, if the system encounters the element in a different section where the Recalc
(sis notpage.
e
check
box
selected,
it resolves the element only once.
H
h
ra
Sa
216
to
Lesson 9
Defining Process Lists
Setting Up Process Lists

Process lists control processing at the highest level. They identify:
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
You can create one or multiple process lists, depending on how you want to organize and run the process.
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
Student Notes
a
h
a) nt G
c
io tuLists
de
rProcess
a
Page Used to Define the Sectionstin
n is S
o
Use this page to define the
sections inth
a process list:
e@
h
e
s
u
ah
r
a
(s
e
H
h
a
r
Sa
Slide 132
217
Lesson 9
Page Name
Navigation
Process Lists - Definition
Processing, Process Lists, Definition
e
ens
ra
li
e
l
b
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
218
(s
e
H
to
Lesson 9
Defining Process Lists (continued)
Setup Considerations for Sections and Process Lists

Review these guidelines for setting up sections and process lists:
Determine the exact sequence in which you want to process elements and sections.
Entitlement processing increases entitlement balances; take processing reduces these balances.
If you include absence entitlement and absence take elements on the same process list, and list entitlement
elements before take elements, the additional balance will be available for the take processing.
e
ens
Slide 133
to
Student Notes
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
o take processing or you can create one
nand
You can create separate process lists for entitlement processing
a
s
process list for both, depending on your organization'saneeds.
Youid
doenot need to include absence-based
h automatically
u
)
entitlement elements on a process list. They areaprocessed
when the Take program processes
G
t
c
n
the related take element.

rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
th
e@ son
Affect of Processing Sequence
Entitlement
Balances
h
e
h
u
rarun entitlement and take processing in any order you choose, you typically process
Although you
can
a
s
entitlement
e ( elements first. As the following examples illustrate, the timing can directly affect entitlement
H
hbalances that are available for take processing.
a
r
Sa Assume that you process entitlement elements first. In the following example, the payee receives the monthly
Creating Multiple Process Lists
entitlement of 20 hours. When you process the take elements, the system subtracts 15 hours, leaving an
entitlement balance of 5 hours.
Entitlement Process
20 hours
Take Process
-15 hours
Entitlement Balance
5 hours
If you process take elements first, the system subtracts 15 hours, leaving an entitlement balance of 5 hours as
shown in this table.
219
Lesson 9
Take Process
-15 hours
Entitlement Process
20 hours
Entitlement Balance
5 hours
If your organization does not allow a negative balance, the payee might have to take the 15 hours as unpaid
time or have the 15 hours deducted from the entitlement that is associated with another absence take, if
permitted by your organization.
Take Process
-15 hrs
Paid as Unpaid Leave
15 hrs
Entitlement Process
20 hrs
Balance
20 hrs
e
ens
ra
li
e
l
b
Only when the entitlement process is run does the payee receive the monthly entitlement of 20 hours.
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
220
(s
e
H
to
Lesson 9
Activity 8: Defining a Processing Framework

In this activity you will review the activity overview and:

1. Create sections for entitlements and takes.
2. Create a process list for entitlements and takes.
Slide 134
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
(s
e
H
221
Lesson 9
Activity Overview
In this activity, you will create new entitlement and take sections and attach them to a new process list.
Specifically you will:
Create two sections.

Create a standard section, named Ent Sect with an effective date of January 1, 2010. Add the PTO Ent
entitlement element with a sequence of 10 and the Float Ent entitlement element with a sequence of 20.
Create an absence take section named Take Sect with an effective date of January 1, 2010. Add the PTO
Take element with a sequence of 10.
Create a process list for entitlements and takes.
e
ens
Name the process list Monthly and give it an effective date of January 1, 2010. Add the Ent Sect section
with a sequence of 10 and the Take Sect section a sequence of 20.
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
fe
s
n
a
ra
Sa
222
(s
e
H
ra
li
e
l
b
to
Lesson 9
Perform the detailed steps to complete the activity
Creating Sections for Absence Entitlements and Takes

To create a new section for absence entitlement elements:
1. Select Set Up HRMS, Product Related, Global Payroll & Absence Mgmt, Framework, Processing,
Sections.
3. On the Section Name page, enter the following information:
Value or Status
Name
Ent Sect
Seq Nbr
10
Element Type
Abs Entitl
Element Name
PTO Ent
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
Description
Entitlement Section
tra
n
o
4. Enter the following information on the Definition page:a n
e
s
d
a
i
h Gu
)
a
Page Element
c dentValue or Status
o
i
r
nta is Stu
Effective Date
January 1, 2010
o
e@ se th
Section Use hh
Absence Process Only
u
a
r
a
(sType
Section
Standard
e
H
h
ra
Sa
Page Element
e
ens
5. Click the Add a New Row button in the Section Element List region and enter the following information:
Page Element
Value or Status
Seq Nbr
20
Element Type
Abs Entitl
Element Name
Float Ent
6. Click Save.
223
Lesson 9
Create a New Section for Absence Take Elements

To create a new section for absence take elements:
1. On the Sections - Definition page, click the Add button at the bottom of the page to add another section.
2. On the Section Name page, enter the following information:

Page Element
Value or Status
Name
Take Sect
Description
Take Section

Page Element
Value or Status
Effective Date
January 1, 2010
e
ens
li
e
l
b
ra
sfe
n
Section Use
Absence Processa
Only
tr
n
noTake
Section Type
Absence
a
s uide
a
h
Seq Nbr
a) nt10G
c
rio tude Abs Take

Element Type
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
Element Name
PTO Take
h
h
u
ara
s
4. Click(Save.
e
H
h
ara a Process List

SCreating
To create a process list:

Process Lists.
3. On the Process List Name page, enter the following information:
224
Page Element
Value or Status
Name
Monthly
Description
Monthly Absence
to
Lesson 9

Page Element
Value or Status
Effective Date
January 1, 2010
Calculation Type
Absence Calculation
Seq Nbr
10
Section Element Name
Ent Sect
5. Click the Add a New Row button in the Process List Members region and enter the following
information:
Page Element
Value or Status
Seq Nbr
20
Section Element Name
Take Sect
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
6. Click Save.
no
a
s uide
a
h
This concludes the activity. Please do not continue. ca)
tG
n
e
o
ari Stud
t
n
o his
@
t
e
h
e
s
u
ah
r
a
(s
e
H
h
a
r
Sa
225
Lesson 9
Review

The processing framework determines which elements to process and in what order.
Sections control the order in which individual elements are processed and help organize and break down a
potentially large process list into more manageable pieces.
Process lists identify the sections to resolve during processing and the order in which they resolve.
Slide 135
Student Notes
e
ens
Setup Considerations for the Processing Structure

Consider the following before defining the processing structure:
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
What types of sections do you need to process absence entitlements
takes?
no and
a
s results?
de
How do you want to order your elements to ensure correct
a
i
h
u
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
@ that
This table lists additionaleresources
thprovide more details about the topics that we have discussed in this
h
e
s
lesson:
u
ah
r
a
(s
e
Topic
See
H
h
ra
Sa Sections
Processing Elements," Using Sections

Processing Elements," Setting Up Sections
Process lists

Processing Elements," Using Process Lists
Processing Elements," Setting Up Process Lists
Processing Elements," Ordering Elements and Sections in a Process List
226
to
Lesson 10
Setting Up Calendars
Objectives
Describe calendar concepts.
to
li
e
l
b
Define run types.

Define periods.
Define calendars.
e
ens
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
Define calendar groups.
no
a
s uide
a
h
Slide 137
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
u
ah
r
a
(s
e
H
h
a
r
Sa
227
Lesson 10
Describing Calendar Concepts
Calendar Framework
When processing absences, the system identifies three key criteria that the calendar framework ties together:
Payee selectionwhich payees to process.
Process selectionwhich elements to process for the selected payees.
Pay periodwhat span of time to include in processing.
e
ens
Slide 138
ra
li
e
l
b
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
228
(s
e
H
to
Lesson 10
Describing Calendar Concepts (continued)
Calendar Framework (continued)

This diagram shows how the calendar framework ties together the organizational and processing frameworks:
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
Slide 139
Student Notes
e(
h
ara
SComponents of the Calendar Framework

The calendar framework consists of:
Calendars that identify who, what, and when to process.
Pay groups identify who gets paid and are ultimately associated with calendars. You identify pay groups
when you define the organizational structure.
Process lists specify the order in which elements are processed and are associated with calendars, through
run types. You identify a process list when you define the processing framework.
The period to calculate is specified by the calendar period ID.
Calendar groups that identify which calendars to process together.
229
Lesson 10
Defining Run Types
Creating a Run Type

This diagram shows how a run type fits into the calendar framework:
e
ens
ra
li
e
l
b
fe
s
n
a
Slide 140
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
(s
e
H
Student
rah Notes
Sa
Page Used to Define Run Types

Use this page to define run types:
230
to
Lesson 10
Page Name
Navigation
Run Types
Processing, Run Types, Run Types
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
(s
e
H
rahNote. The same run types can be used by more than one calendar.
a
S
231
Lesson 10
Defining Periods
Defining Periods
This diagram shows how a period fits into the calendar framework:
e
ens
ra
li
e
l
b
fe
s
n
a
Slide 141
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
(s
e
H
Student
rah Notes
Sa
Creating Single or Multiple Periods

You can set up single periods or automatically create multiple periods.
Pages Used to Set Up Periods

Use these pages to set up periods.
232
to
Lesson 10
Use this page to set up a single period:

Page Name
Navigation
Periods
Calendars, Periods, Periods
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
(s
e
H
233
Lesson 10
Use this page to automatically create multiple periods instead of creating one period at a time:
Page Name
Navigation
Automatic Period Creation
Calendars, Automatic Period Creation, Automatic Period Creation
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
ra
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
@ thethunit of measure for the periods. The Day and Month values, used in
Unit of Measure he Select
e with the Units in Period field determine the number of days or
s
h
conjunction
u
a
ar
months in a period. The Semimonth value represents 15 days. The first
s
(
semimonthly period always includes days 1 to 15. The second period includes
e
H
days 16 to 28, 29, 30, or 31, depending on the month. When you select this
h
Sa
value, the Units in Period field becomes unavailable.
Note. After processing begins, you cannot edit the fields on the Period, Calendar, or Calendar Group pages.
If you need to make any changes, you must cancel the run.
234
Lesson 10
Defining Calendars
Creating Calendars
Through pay groups, calendars bring payees together with the rules and processes to calculate, accumulate,
aggregate, and sequence elements.
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
Slide 142
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ah
(s
e
H
ar
Notes
SStudent
Page Used to Define Calendar Criteria
Use this page to link together the pay group, period, run type, target calendar, and payee selection criteria in
preparation for an absence run:
235
Lesson 10
Page Name
Navigation
Calendars - Definition
Calendars, Calendars, Definition
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
ra
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
Note. All payee selection logic is based on pay group.
Any calendars
which Active Payees is selected must
Gand run on
a) period
t
c
n
be unique based on the combination of pay

group,
ID,
type.
This requirement reduces the
io tude
possibility of duplicate processing. tar
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
u
ah
r
a
(s
e
hH
Sa
236
Lesson 10
Defining Calendars (continued)
Defining Calendar Generation Controls

You define generation control frequencies for a calendar for two purposes:
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
During batch processing, the system compares the calendar frequency to the generation control frequencies
that are entered at the element level. If they match, the element is processed.
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
Student Notes
a
h
a) nt G
c
de
rio Controls
u
a
Page Used to Define Calendar Generation
t
t
n is S
o
Use this page to select generation
th frequencies for the calendar:
e@ secontrol
h
u
ah
r
a
Page Name
Navigation
(s
e
H
h
Generation
Control
a
r
Calendars, Generation Control
Sa
Slide 143
237
Lesson 10
Excluding Elements from Calendars

You can exclude certain absence take or absence entitlement elements from a calendar.
The listed elements are excluded from the process list and are not processed. This also means that:
The system ignores positive input (adjustments to frequency-based entitlement).
A formula cannot assign a value to the excluded element.
Slide 144
Student Notes
Page Used to Exclude Elements from a Calendar
ra
238
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
Page Name
Navigation
h
a) nt G
c
deRelated, Global Payroll & Absence Mgmt, Framework,

Excluded Elements
Set Up
HRMS,
rio Product
u
a
t
t
Calendars,
n isExcluded
S Elements
o
e@ se th
h
u
ah
r
a
(s
e
hH
Use this page to exclude elements from the selected calendar:
Sa
e
ens
to
Lesson 10
Automatically Creating Multiple Calendars

With automatic calendar creation, you can set up multiple calendars at the same time. You define these details
for the calendars:
Calendar name prefix
Pay group
Run type
Frequency
to
First period ID
Payee selection criteria
Payment date
e
ens
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
Slide 145
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
Student Notes
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
Page Used to Create Multiple
Calendars
e@ se th
h
h
Use this page tora
automatically
ucreate multiple calendars at one time:
a
(s
e
H
h
a
r
Sa
239
Lesson 10
Page Name
Navigation
Automatic Calendar Creation
Calendars, Automatic Calendar Creation, Automatic Calendar Creation
e
ens
ra
li
e
l
b
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
240
(s
e
H
to
Lesson 10
Defining Calendar Groups

Use calendar groups to process multiple calendars at the same time:
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
Slide 146
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
(s
e
H
Student
rah Notes
Sa
Page Used to Create Calendar Groups

Use this page to group calendars together for processing at the same time:
241
Lesson 10
Page Name
Navigation
Calendar Groups
Calendars, Calendar Groups, Calendar Group
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
Considerations When Defining Calendar Groupsas
de
i
h
u
)
agroup:
Consider these points when defining a calendar
tG
c
n
e
o
d select on the run control page across all the members of
ri thattuyou
aphases
t
The system executes the processing
n
o his Sthose calendars that require identical calculations.
the calendar group, so only
process together
@
e se t
h
u group determines the processing sequence.

The calendarrorder
ah in the calendar
a
(s
e
H
h
a
r
Sa
242
Lesson 10
Defining Calendar Groups (continued)
Setup Considerations for Calendar Groups

Some important points about calendar groups:
e
ens
to
Slide 147
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
r
t
n
Student Notes
no
a
s uide
a
h
Omitting a Calendar from a Run
a) nt G
c
deand then decide not to process one of the calendars after

riopay group
If you attach several calendars to the
same
u
a
t
t
S
the payee identification processoisncomplete,
you must cancel the entire run before running any of the other
s
i
@
h
t
calendars.
he use
h
ra
a
s
e(
H
rah
a
S
243
Lesson 10
Accumulator Considerations for Calendar Groups

Consider how processing calendars out of sequence can affect accumulators:
Accumulators are included in calendar processing by determining which finalized calendar is most recent
for the country being processed.
Accumulator values are stored for each calendar based on the accumulator from/to dates, not the pay period
begin/end dates.
If the accumulator from/to dates include any day in the period, the accumulator is written to the results
tables.
to
li
e
l
b
When calendars are processed out of order, accumulator values might be inaccurate.
e
ens
ra
An accumulator might not be written to the results tables and therefore would not be included in the next
calendar. Thus, the accumulator values could not be referenced or updated.
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
Slide 148
no
a
s uide
a
h
Student Notes
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
Example: Inaccurate Accumulators
o
th
e@before
h
e
If you run a March calendar
a February calendar, the starting balances for the February calendar will
s
ahfrom March.u
include the results
r
a
(s
e
H
h
a
r
Sa
244
Lesson 10
Retroactivity Considerations for Calendar Groups

Processing calendars out of period sequence can impact retroactive processing:
The system bases retro limit dates on the dates of the first calendar that it encounters for a payee within a
calendar group ID.
This is true even if the system later encounters other calendars with earlier period dates.
The system determines which calendars to rerun by accessing the earliest calendar finalize timestamp,
where the calendar period end date is greater than the trigger effective date.
Slide 149
Student Notes
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
Example: Retro Limit Dates
no
a
s them
Suppose that you run calendars in this order and then a
finalize
dinethe same order:
i
h
u
a) nt G
c
January (calendar 1)
rio tude
a
t
n is S
February (calendar 2)
o
@ th
January (calendar 3) he
e
s
h
u
a
ar 4)
March (calendar
s
(
e
H
If
you
h enter retro data for February 15 (the trigger date), the system will process calendars 2, 3, and 4 again.
a
r
Sa
245
Lesson 10
Activity 9: Setting Up Calendars


1. Create a run type.
2. Create periods.
3. Create calendars.
4. Create two calendar groups.
Slide 150
e
ens
ra
li
e
l
b
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
246
(s
e
H
to
Lesson 10
Activity Overview
This diagram illustrates the calendar framework that you will create for absence processing:
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
Sa
ra
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
Note. Some values in this activity depend on the )payroll system
that you are using in class. Your instructor
G the
ause to determine
t
c
will indicate which payroll system you should
correct values for this activity.
n
e
o
i
d
r
nta is Stu
o
e@ se th
h
Create a run type

ahfor absenceu processing.
r
a
(srun type Absence and give it an effective date of January 1, 2010. Associate the run type with the
Name
the
e
H list that you created earlier called Monthly and enter instructions to process retro triggers.
h process
Create periods.
Create a run control ID of PS. Specify a frequency of monthly, with the begin date of January 1, 2010 and
the end date of December 31, 2010. For the period ID prefix, enter ABS, a period frequency suffix of M, and
enter a sequence number of 1.
Run the automatic period creation process and check Process Monitor to ensure that the run completes
successfully.
Create calendars.
Create a new run control ID called CAL. The calendar ID prefix is CAL and the pay group is Pay Grp.
Select Absence as the run type and specify a frequency of monthly. The first period ID is ABSM01 and the
calendar is to be processed for active payees only.
Run the process to create the calendars.
247
Lesson 10
Create calendar groups for January 2010 and February 2010.

Create each calendar group for the country specified by your instructor, using the naming convention Jan
2010 Grp and Feb 2010 Grp. Associate each calendar group with the pay entity and pay group that you
created earlier in class (Pay Ent and Pay Grp). For the calendar ID enter CAL ABSM01 (or M02, as
appropriate).
Use the following table to determine the appropriate field values to use when creating calendar groups:
Payroll System
Country
Payroll for North America
USA
Payroll Interface
CYM
e
ens
ra
li
e
l
b
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
248
(s
e
H
to
Lesson 10
Creating a Run Type

To create a run type:
1. Select Set Up HRMS, Product Related, Global Payroll & Absence Mgmt, Framework, Processing, Run
Types.
2. Add a new run type called Absence.
3. Enter the following information on the Run Types page:
Page Element
Value or Status
Description
Absence run
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
Calculation Type
Absence Calculation
tra
n
no1, 2010
Effective Date
January
a
s uide
a
h
Process Name
G
a) ntMonthly
c
e
o
ari Stud Selected
Process Retro Triggers
t
n
o his
@
t
e
4. Click Save.
h
e
s
u
ah
r
a
(s
e
CreatingH
Periods
h
a
r
Sa To create periods for January through December:
1. Select Set Up HRMS, Product Related, Global Payroll & Absence Mgmt, Framework, Calendars,
Automatic Period Creation.
2. Select Add a New Value and enter PS as the run control ID.
249
Lesson 10
3. Enter the following information on the Automatic Period Creation page:

Page Element
Value or Status
Frequency ID
Unit of Measure
Month
Units in Period
Begin Date
January 1, 2010
End Date
December 31, 2010
Period ID Prefix
ABS
Period Frequency Suffix
Sequence Number
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
5. Click Run.
a
s uide
a
h
6. Click OK to run the Automatic Period Creation
process
(GP_AUTO_PRD).
)
G
a
t
c
n
e
o
7. Click the Process Monitor link to check
status
d of the run.
u
ari the
t
t
n
S until the Run Status changes to Success when the process is
sstatus
Click the Refresh button
too
check the
i
@
h
t
complete.
he use
h
ra
a
s
e(
CreatingH
Calendars
rahTo create calendars:
a
S
4. Click Save.
1. Select Set Up HRMS, Product Related, Global Payroll & Absence Mgmt, Framework, Calendars,
Automatic Calendar Creation.
2. Select Add a New Value and enter CAL as the run control ID.
250
Lesson 10
3. Enter the following information on the Automatic Calendar Creation page:

Page Element
Value or Status
Calendar ID Prefix
CAL
Pay Group
Pay Grp
Run Type
Absence
Frequency
First Period ID
ABSM01
Payee Selection - Active Payees Only
Selected
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
4. Click Run.
ra
e
f
s
6. Check the status using the Process Monitor link until the process completes
n successfully.
a
r
t
onn
a de
Creating Calendar Groups
s
a
h Gui
)
To create two calendar groups:
a
c dent
o
i
r
nta isGlobal
Stu Payroll & Absence Mgmt, Framework, Calendars,
o
Calendar Groups.
e@ se th
h
2. Add a new calendar

ah groupuwith the calendar group ID: Jan 2010 Grp.
r
a
s following information for the new calendar group:
(the
3. Enter
e
H
h
a
r
Page Element
Value or Status
Sa
5. Click OK to run the GP_AUTO_CAL process.
Description
January 2010 calendar group
Country
USA (for PNA)

OR
Sequence
10
Pay Group
Pay Grp
Calendar ID
CAL ABSM01
CYM (for PI)
4. Click Save.
5. Click the Add button to add a calendar group for February.
251
Lesson 10
6. For the Calendar Group ID, enter Feb 2010 Grp.
7. Enter the following information on the Calendar Groups page:

Page Element
Value or Status
Description
February 2010 calendar group
Country
USA (for PNA)
(Choose the value based on your Payroll system. Use

the information specified in the Activity Overview.)
OR
Sequence
10
Pay Group
Pay Grp
Calendar ID
CAL ABSM02
CYM (for PI)
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
252
(s
e
H
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
8. Click Save.
e
ens
to
Lesson 10
Review

Pay calendars tie together the processing and organizational frameworks.
A run type is a way of identifying an absence run.
A period ID identifies what time period to calculate when you run the absence process.
Calendars link payees through pay groups to absence runs.
Use calendar groups to process multiple calendars together at the same time.
to
e
ens
Slide 151
Student Notes
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
Consider the following before setting up calendars:
a
s uide
a
h
What periods do I need to process?
a) nt G
c
de processing time?
rio fortuoptimal
How should I group the calendars a
together
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
u
ah
r
a
This table(s
lists additional resources that provide more details about the topics that we have discussed in this
e
lesson:
H
h
a
r
Sa Topic
See
Setup Considerations for Calendars
Run types
PeopleSoft Enterprise Absence Management 9.1 PeopleBook, "Using Calendars,"

Defining Run Types
Periods

Creating Periods
Calendars

Creating Single Periods
Using the Automatic Calendar Creation Feature
Calendar groups

253
ra
Sa
fe
s
n
a
ra
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
h
(s
e
H
li
e
l
b
e
ens
to
Lesson 11
Managing Payee Data

Objectives
Explain integration with PeopleSoft Enterprise Human Resources.
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
View payee data.
ra
fe
s
n
a
Slide 153
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
(s
e
H
255
Managing Payee Data
Lesson 11
Explaining Integration with PeopleSoft Enterprise Human Resources
Human Resources and Absence Management Integration

Absence Management integrates with Human Resources and uses certain data from that system, including:
e
ens
Slide 154
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
Adding Payees
h
)
G
a
tpayee
c
n
You add payees through Human Resources.

To
process
a
through Absence Management, you must
e
o
ri tud
a
update the payee's Job record.
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
u
ah
r
a
(s
e
H
h
a
r
Sa
Student Notes
256
to
Lesson 11
Managing Payee Data

(continued)
Human Resources and Absence Management Integration (continued)
The Payroll page in the Job component identifies the payroll system and absence system through which a
payee is processed.
Absence Management processes only those payees that have:
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
Slide 155
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
Student Notes
e@ se th
h
u
ah
r
a
s
Page Usede
to(Select Payees' Payroll System and Absence System
H
h
a
Use
this page to select a payee's payroll system and absence system:
r
Sa
257
Managing Payee Data
Lesson 11
Page Name
Navigation
Payroll
Workforce Administration, Job Information, Job Data, Payroll
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
(s
e
H
Effective Date
Absence Management processes absence data for periods after the effective date that is associated with the
selection of the absence system.
For example, say that you install Absence Management in June 2011, a year after you implement PeopleSoft
Enterprise Payroll Interface. You insert a row in the Job component with an effective date of June 1, 2011, the
date of the Absence Management implementation. The system processes absence data for periods after June
1, 2011.
Selecting the Absence Management Pay Group

Before you can select a payee's absence management pay group, you must map absence management pay
groups to payroll pay groups. The payroll pay group that's selected for the payee controls which absence
management pay groups you can associate with a payee.
258
Lesson 11
Managing Payee Data

(continued)
Human Resources Tables that Populate Database System Elements
These Human Resources tables populate database system elements:
PERSON
PER_ORG_INST (person organizational instance)
PERS_DATA_EFFDT (personal data effective date)
ADDRESSES
PER_ORG_ASGN_VW
CONTRACT_DATA
PER_ORG_ASGN (person organizational assignment)
WKF_CNT_TYPE (workforce contract type)
JOB (including fields from country-specific sub records)
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
Student Notes
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
Defining Database System Elements
n is S
o
th
e@
Database system elements
containepayee-related
data that is retrieved from Human Resources and is
h
s
h
u
commonly usedra
absence calculations. You don't have to do anything to set them up, or do anything special
a inThey
to resolve(them.
are resolved when they're used in a calculation, providing a direct interface to Human
s
e
Resources.
H
h
a
r
Sa
Slide 156
259
Managing Payee Data
Lesson 11
Viewing Payee Data
Viewing Payee Job Information

Absence Management enables you to view a summary of a payee's job information.
e
ens
li
e
l
b
ra
Slide 157
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
Student Notes
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
Page Used to View Payee Job Information

rio tude
a
t
Use this page to view information
nthat isistored
S on the Job record in Human Resources:
o
s
e@ se th
h
Page Name
uNavigation
ah
r
a
(sInformation
e
Review
Job
Global Payroll & Absence Management, Payee Data, Review Job Information, Job
H
Information
h
ra
a
S
260
to
Lesson 11
Managing Payee Data
Activity 10: Updating Payee Information

In this activity, you will review the activity overview and update payee information in Human Resources.
Slide 158
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
(s
e
H
261
Managing Payee Data
Lesson 11
Activity Overview
In this activity, you will select the pay system and absence system for two payees and assign to each payee a
payroll pay group, an absence pay group, and other data shown in the following table:
Page Element
Value or Status
Pay Group (payroll)
KLA (for PNA)

system. Use the information specified in the table of field
values.)
OR
Tax Location Code
B-001 {Corporate Headquarters} (for PNA)

system. Use the information specified in the table of field
values.)
OR
Pay Group (absence)
Pay Grp
KLP (for PI)
Leave this field empty (for PI)
e
ens
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
o
n
a
Use Pay Group Rate Type
Selected
e
s
d
a
i
h Gu
)
a
t
Use Pay Group As of Date
c denSelected
o
i
r
nta is Stu
Field Values for this Activity
o
e@ se th
h
h that you
Important! Thea
values
u use to update payee data differ depending on whether the class is using
r
a
Payroll for
North
America
or
Payroll Interface.
(s
e
hUseHthe following table to provide you with the Empl IDs and field values you use when updating payee data:
Use Pay Group Eligibility
Selected
ra
Sa
Payroll System
Empl IDs
(Payroll) Pay Group
Tax Location Code
KUL601 (Reggie)
KLA
B-001 (Corporate
Headquarters)
KLP
Leave this field empty
KUL701 (Jill)
Payroll Interface
K0LA01 (Ted)
K0LB02 (Bailey)
262
to
Lesson 11
Managing Payee Data
Updating Payee Data

To update a payee's payroll and absence data:
1. Select Workforce Administration, Job Information, Job Data.
2. Enter the first employee ID, indicated in the provided Field Values table based on your payroll system:
_________.
(For PNA enter KUL601, and for PI enter KOLA01.)
e
ens
3. On the Work Location page, click the Add a New Row button (+) to add an effective dated row for
January 1, 2010.
to
Ignore any warning messages about dates out of range.

4. In the Action field, select Change of Pay System.
ra
fe
s
n
a
r
t
n
5. On the Payroll page, enter the following information:
no
a
s uide
a
h
Page Element
Value or Status
)
G
a
t
c
n
e
o
Payroll System
ari Stud Payroll for North America
t
n
o basedhonisyour Payroll OR
(Choose the value for this field
@
t in the table of Payroll Interface
e
system. Use the information
specified
h
e
s
h Activity uOverview.)
field values in
athe
r
a
(s System
e
Absence
Absence Management
hH
ra
Sa
li
e
l
b
Pay Group
KLA (for PNA)

OR
Tax Location Code
B-001 {Corporate Headquarters} (for PNA)

OR
KLP (for PI)
Leave this field empty (for PI)
6. Enter the following information in the Absence Management System region of the Payroll page:
Page Element
Value or Status
Pay Group
Pay Grp
7. Verify that the Use Pay Group Eligibility,Use Pay Group Rate Type, and Use Pay Group As of Date fields
are selected.
263
Managing Payee Data
Lesson 11
8. Click Save.
9. Click the Return to Search button.
10. Repeat steps three through eight for the second employee ID in the Field Values table: _________.
(For PNA enter KUL701, and for PI enter K0LB02.)

e
ens
ra
li
e
l
b
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
264
(s
e
H
to
Lesson 11
Managing Payee Data
Review

Absence Management processes only those payees for whom the Absence Management system is selected
on the Payroll page.
You can view payee job information in Absence Management by using the Job Information page.
Slide 159
Student Notes
e
ens
to
ic
l
e
This table lists additional resources that provide more details about the topics that we have
bl discussed in this
a
r
lesson:
fe
s
n
tra
n
Topic
See
no
a
s uide 9.1 PeopleBook: Administer Workforce,
a
Adding payees
PeopleSoft Enterprise
Human Resources
h
)
"Increasing the
aWorkforce,"
tG
c
n
e
o
ud Absence Management 9.1 PeopleBook, "Working with
ari S
t
t
Viewing payee data
PeopleSoft
Enterprise
n
o PayeehData,"
is Viewing Payee Data
@
t
e
h use
h
a
ar
s
(
e
H
h
ra
Sa
265
ra
Sa
fe
s
n
a
ra
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
h
(s
e
H
li
e
l
b
e
ens
to
Lesson 12
Entering and Processing Absences

Objectives
Enter absence events.
to
li
e
l
b
Explain entitlement and take processing.

Run the absence process.
Describe the processing phases and options.
e
ens
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
View process results.
no
a
s uide
a
h
Slide 161
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
u
ah
r
a
(s
e
H
h
a
r
Sa
267
Lesson 12
Entering Absence Events
Absence Entry Procedure

When a payee is absent from work at a normally scheduled work time, you record the absence take, the begin
and end dates, and other details that you want to track.
To enter an absence event:
e
ens
ra
li
e
l
b
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
Slide 162
ra
Sa
(s
e
H
Student Notes
Page Used to Enter Basic Information for an Absence Event
Use this page to enter basic information for an absence event:
268
to
Lesson 12
Page Name
Navigation
Absence Event Entry
Global Payroll & Absence Mgmt, Payee Data, Maintain Absences, Absence Event,
Absence Event Entry
Modifying and Voiding Absence Events

Use the Absence Event Entry page to enter, modify, and void absence events:
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
era
f
s
n the Process Action to Void.
To enter instructions for voiding a processed absence, delete the row, roraset
t
on back to the payee and updates the
When you run the absence process, the system credits the entitlement
n
a de
relevant accumulators.
s
a
h Gui
)
a
c dent
o
i
r
The Forecast Button
ta Stu
n
o
is can click the Forecast button to determine if the entitlement
If you have enabled online@
forecasting,hyou
t
e
balance will cover theh
entered absence
e event.
s
h
u
a
ar
See Also
s
(
e
H
rahDefining Forecasting and Balance Inquiry Processes
a
S
To modify an unprocessed absence event, update the displayed values or delete the row and add a new row.
269
Lesson 12
Entering Absence Events (continued)
Entering Absence Details

The Absence Management system enables you to:
e
ens
ra
li
e
l
b
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
Slide 163
(s
e
StudentHNotes
h
ra
Sa
Page Used to Enter Details for an Absence Event

Use this page to enter details for an absence event:
270
to
Lesson 12
Page Name
Navigation
Absence Event Input Detail
Global Payroll & Absence Mgmt, Payee Data, Maintain Absences, Absence Event
Click the Details link for an absence event on the Absence Event Entry page.
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
(s
e
H
Using User Defined Fields

Values that you enter in these fields populate system elements during take processing, making the data
available for use in count formulas. The system elements that are populated are named EVT CONFIGx YY,
where x = 1, 2, 3, or 4 and YY = DT (date), DC (decimal), CH (character), or MN (monetary).
Example: A date entered in the Date 1 field will populate the EVT CONFIG1 DT system element.
Overriding or Adjusting Entitlement

If the entitlement associated with the take element is absence-based, you can:
Override the entitlement amount for this absence event.
271
Lesson 12
Adjust the payee's entitlement balance.

Adjustments and overrides to entitlement that is frequency-based are discussed in another lesson.
Reporting Half-Day Absences and Partial Hours
Consider these points when reporting partial hours:

Partial Hours refers to partial hours absent from work.
You can enter partial hours or specify half days, but do not do both. The All Days check box works with
both options.
Partial hours reported during absence entry populate the PARTIAL HOURS system element.
For the system to recognize partial hours entered by a user, the take's day formula must take into account
partial hours.
See Also
e
ens
Adjusting Frequency-Based Entitlement
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
Implementing Absence Take Features, Using Mapping to Generate Absence Data for Two Take Elements
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
Implementing Absence Take Features, Explaining How to Store Data in User Defined Fields
ra
Sa
272
(s
e
H
to
Lesson 12
Activity 11: Entering an Absence Event

In this activity, you will review the activity overview and enter an absence event.
Slide 164
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
(s
e
H
273
Lesson 12
Activity Overview
In this activity, you will record a one-day absence for PTO Take on January 4, 2010 using one of the
employee IDs in the following table:
Payroll System
Employee ID
KUL601 (Reggie)
Payroll Interface
K0LA01 (Ted)
e
ens
ra
li
e
l
b
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
274
(s
e
H
to
Lesson 12
Detailed Activity Steps
Entering an Absence Event

To enter an absence event:
1. Select Global Payroll & Absence Mgmt, Payee Data, Maintain Absences, Absence Event.
2. Select the employee ID from the table in the Activity Overview, based on your payroll system:
_________
(For PNA, enter KUL601, for PI, enter KOLA01).
e
ens
3. Enter a From date of January 4, 2010 and click the Refresh button.
li
e
l
b
4. Enter the following information (leave all other fields blank):

Page Element
Value or Status
to
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
Absence Take Element
PTO Take
no
a
e
s January
d2010
a
i
Begin Date
4,
h
u
a) nt G
c
End Date
rio tude January 4, 2010
a
t
n is S
o
5. Click Save.
e@ se th
h
u
ah
r
a
This concludes the
(sactivity. Please do not continue.
e
H
h
a
r
Sa
275
Lesson 12
Explaining Entitlement and Take Processing
Absence Processing
This table summarizes what the system does during entitlement and take processing:
Entitlement Processing
Take Processing
Resolves entitlement accrual.
Creates daily data.
Updates entitlement balances.
Calculates paid and unpaid units by applying rules to

the daily data.
e
ens
Generates positive input for your payroll system.

Updates entitlement balances.
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
Student Notes
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
Specifying What to Process
a
t
on his S the system retrieves the process list that is attached to the
When you run the absence@
process (GPPDPRUN),
t and tries to resolve the appropriate absence elements for each payee.
e the runsetype)
h
absence calendar (through
u
ah
r
a
You can have
(s the system process entitlements and takes separately or in the same run.
e
H
h
a
r
Sa
Slide 165
276
Lesson 12
Explaining Entitlement and Take Processing (continued)
Daily Data
Take processing expands each absence event and creates a row of daily data for each day of the event, plus
the day before and the day after the event:
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
Slide 166
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ah
(s
e
H
ar
Notes
SStudent
Sources of Daily Data
This diagram in the slide shows some sources of daily data.
The take process retrieves data from the payee's schedule and absence event and stores it in daily data. The
system applies the rules that you defined for the take element to the schedule and absence event data to
determine the beginning entitlement balance, absent units, paid and unpaid units, ending balance, and other
information.
The take element's day formula interprets each day of the absence and returns the number of units that the
absent day represents (for example, four hours or one day).
After the system calculates the absence day count, it:
Compares the count to the entitlement balance.
Determines whether a wait period or any other requirements for payment have been met.
Determines whether any part of the absent day should be paid.
277
Lesson 12
Calculates the ending entitlement balance.
e
ens
ra
li
e
l
b
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
278
(s
e
H
to
Lesson 12
Processing Steps
This illustration shows the absence processing steps:
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
Student Notes
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
Overview of Processing Steps

rio tude
a
t
To process absences, you must:on
sS
i
@
h
t
htoeprocess.
e
1. Identify the payees

s
h
u
a
r
abegins
s
(
The cycle
when you run a process that identifies all payees to be calculated.
e
H
rah2. Calculate absence data.
a
S
During this phase, the system computes absence entitlement units, absence take units, or both, depending
Slide 167
on the process list. Take processing is what generates daily data.

3. Review the results.
If the system encounters problems during the Calculate phase (for example, invalid element definitions or
payee eligibility problems), it places the payee in error. You can use various pages to review summary
results, errors, and warning messages.
4. Correct any errors.
After correcting errors, run the Calculate phase again to process only the payees that need to be
recalculated.
5. Finalize the results.
When you are satisfied with the processing results, run the Finalize phase to close the calendar group.
279
Lesson 12
Running the Absence Process (continued)
Entering Processing Instructions

When you are ready to run the absence process, the system enables you to:
e
ens
Slide 168
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
Page Used to Run the Absence Process
h
a) nt G
c
Use this page to enter instructions for absence

de
rio processing:
u
a
t
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
u
ah
r
a
(s
e
H
h
a
r
Sa
fe
s
n
a
Student Notes
280
ra
li
e
l
b
to
Lesson 12
Page Name
Navigation
Calculate Absence and Payroll
Global Payroll & Absence Mgmt, Absence and Payroll Processing, Calculate
Absence and Payroll, Calculate Absence and Payroll
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
Sa
tr
n
no
a
s are valid
The only calendar groups a
that
Calendar Group ID
dforeselection are those that have not been
i
h
u
finalized. Finalized calendars
Gnot eligible for further processing.
a) nare
t
c
io is automatically
de selected after you run the Identify phase. It
rbox
u
a
This check
Open
t
t
n thatiyou
o
signifies
s Scan still process changes and remains selected until you run the
@
h
t
he Finalize
e phase.
s
h
u
ra
a
This button opens the Process Scheduler Request page, where you can submit the
Run
s
(
e
process to run.
H
rah
Process Monitor
This link enables you to review the status of scheduled or running processes.
Report Manager
This link enables you to view your list of reports and report content, check the
status of a job, and see content detail messages.
281
Lesson 12
Selecting Debugging and Tuning Options

When entering instructions for running absence calculations, you can also enter instructions to:
e
ens
Slide 169
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
Student Notes
no
a
s uide
a
h
Page Used to Select Debugging and Tuning
for Absence Processing
a)Options
tG
c
n
e
o
Use this page to select options for performance
ud and debugging:
ari Sttuning
t
n
o his
@
t
e
h
e
s
u
ah
r
a
(s
e
H
h
a
r
Sa
282
to
Lesson 12
Page Name
Navigation
Debug and Tuning Options
Global Payroll & Absence Mgmt, Absence and Payroll Processing, Calculate
Absence and Payroll
Click the Debug and Tuning Options link.
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
(s
e
H
rahDebugging
a
S
Several trace options are available during the Calculate phase. These options enable you to request an element
resolution chaina file with detailed results of the Calculate phasefor payees that will be calculated during
the next run.
283
Lesson 12
No Trace
Select if you don't want to produce an element resolution chain.
Log SQL Time
Select to have the Log File report each time the Payee Data Manager program
opens cursors (SELECT statements that return more than one row) for the Job
table, Employment table, Job Dates table, Person Organization table, and the
Person Organization Instance table during batch processing. This information can
be useful for performance tuning.
Trace Elements in Error Select to produce an element resolution chain that includes only those payees in
error.
Trace All Elements
Select to produce an element resolution chain that shows how all elements were
resolved for the calculated payees. You can determine the intermediate value of
every element and the order in which the elements were resolved.
Generating an Element Resolution Chain
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
Access the Element Resolution Chain page (Global Payroll & Absence Mgmt, Absence and Payroll
Processing, Review Absence/Payroll Info, Element Resolution Chain, Element Resolution Chain) to view
elements that were resolved for a payee during processing.
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
e information:
The Element Resolution Chain page a
shows
dfollowing
rio youtthe
u
t
on hisin S
The begin and end dates @
of the calendar
which the element was processed.
t
e
h
e
hwhich isuaslink to the Detail Audit Chain page where you can view the order in which
The element rname,
a
the element
(saresolved
e
H resolution time for the element, in seconds, and a notification if the system could not trace the
h The
When you run absence calculations, you can generate an element resolution chain that shows, by payee, how
and in what order each element was resolved and how long it took to resolve each element on the process list.
The element resolution chain can be helpful if your absence run is taking a long time to calculate, and you're
trying to do some performance tuning on your rule definitions.
ra
Sa
element's resolution.
The Slice Dates, which are the begin and end dates of the slice in which the element resolved.
Addition information, such as:
The PIN number to which a pointer element resolved. This applies only to elements with a field format of
Pointer.
The amount of the calculated adjustment for the element, such as a retroactive adjustment. This applies
only to elements with a field format of Decimal or Monetary.
The amount before rounding if the element was rounded during processing. This applies only to elements
with a field format of Decimal or Monetary.
284
Lesson 12
Stream Processing
With stream processing, you can divide payees into streams or subsets based on employee ID and run
calculations for either:
Selected payees in the stream.
Two or more streams at the same time.
Processing multiple streams simultaneously can significantly shorten processing time.
You must process each stream before you can finalize the calendar group.
e
ens
to
Slide 170
Student Notes
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
Prerequisites for Stream Processing
a
s uide
a
h
Stream processing requires some setup. Before you
G processing, you must:
a) cannuset stream
c
e Global Payroll & Absence Mgmt, Payee Groups,

dRelated,
1. Use the Streams page (Set Up HRMS,
rioProduct
u
a
t
t
n streams.
Streams, Streams) to defineothe
sS
i
@
h
t
hea range
Each stream defines
ofeEmplID numbers. Streams should not have overlapping EmplIDs.
s
h
u
a
ar administrator partition tables in the database, using employee ID as the key.
2. Have(asdatabase
e
H
rah Note. Not all databases allow partitioning, but where they do, step 2 is recommended for best results.
a
S
3. When creating calendar groups, select the Stream Processing check box on the Calendar Group page.
Processing Streams
You can run the streams all at once or at different times.
To process several streams at once:
1. Select the stream to process through the Calculate Absence and Payroll page.
Note. The Stream Number field is available only if you selected the Perform Stream processing option on
the Calendar Group page. It becomes available when you select the Identify check box.
2. Select the processing options for the first stream.
3. Using a different run control ID, enter the instructions for the next stream.
4. Repeat step (3) for each stream.
285
Lesson 12
Group Lists
A group list is a subset of payees that you can process at the same time. You can:
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
Slide 171
tr
n
Student Notes
no
a
s uide
a
h
Creating Group Lists
a) nt G
c
e Global Payroll & Absence Mgmt, Payee Groups,

dRelated,
rioProduct
u
a
Use the Group Lists page (Set Up HRMS,
t
t
n the payees
o
Group Lists, Group Lists ) to select
s Sto include in the group.
i
@
h
t
ethan one group list.
hein more
s
Do not includeaah
payee
u
ar
s
(
To be
processed,
list members must be associated with the pay calendars that are being processed;
esystem ignoresgroup
H
the
members
who are not.
h
a
r
Sa
Detecting Changes After the Identify Phase
If you run the Calculate phase by group list only, the system does not detect changes to payees that you add or
remove from a calendar after the initial Identify phase. To process overlooked payees, run the Calculate phase
for the entire population, without group lists, before finalizing the run.
286
Lesson 12
Describing the Processing Phases and Options
Processing Phases and Options

When entering processing instructions, select from the following phases and options:
Identify
Suspend
Calculate
Suspend Active
Recalculate All
Cancel
Freeze
Finalize
e
ens
to
Un-Freeze
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
Student Notes
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
Example: Selecting Phases and Options

rio tude
a
t
nhas selected
o
In the following example, the user
s Sthe Calculate phase for the EXAMPLE calendar group.
i
@
h
t
he use
h
ra
a
s
e(
H
rah
a
S
Slide 172
287
Lesson 12
Describing the Processing Phases and Options (continued)
The Identify Phase

Run the Identify phase only once per calendar group ID, or once for each stream, for stream processing.
The Identify phase:
Searches each calendar that is linked to the calendar group ID.
Finds all of the payees who belong to the pay group identified when you set up the calendars.
Identifies the subset of payees that meet the payee selection criteria on the calendars.
Slide 173
Student Notes
ra
288
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
e if the Identify phase has been run
The Identified check box on the run control page is automatically
s uiselected
d
a
h
for all streams. Once all streams are identified, you
G lists for other phases of processing.
a) can nuset group
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
u
ah
r
a
(s
e
hH
The Identified Option
Sa
e
ens
Lesson 12
The Calculate Phase

The Calculate phase:
Calculates absence takes and entitlements.
Calculates one payee at a time, calendar by calendar.
Can be repeated for the same calendar group.
Identifies all payees with iterative triggers, including new hires and transfers, and payees that are placed in
error during a previous calculation.
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
Slide 174
Student Notes
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
Running the Calculate Phase More Than Once
a
s uide
a
h
After the initial calculation, you can rerun the Calculate
Gas many times as necessary. During subsequent
a) nphase
t
c
runs, the system only recalculates:
rio tude
a
t
Payees with iterative triggers.on
sS
i
@
h
t
e sstatus.
e
Payees who are in ah
suspended
h
u
a
r in an error status.
aare
s
Payees(who
e
H
rah Payees who you have manually indicated to be recalculated.
a
S
Using Triggers to Detect New Hires, Terminations, and Other Changes
The mechanism that detects online changes to data that result in a system action is called a trigger. An
iterative trigger causes the system to process (or reprocess) a payee for the current open calendar.
Additional new hires, terminations, and job data changes are detected during the Calculation phase through
the use of triggers.
See Also
Managing Iterative Processing
289
Lesson 12
The Recalculate All Option

The Recalculate All option:
Runs with the Calculate phase.
Recalculates every payee associated with the calendar group.
Instructs the system to delete all existing calculations and calculate each payee again without trying to
determine whether each payee still meets the selection criteria.
e
ens
Slide 175
Student Notes
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
nomightrun the Recalculate All option.
If you make an adjustment that affects many or most payees,
you
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
u
ah
r
a
(s
e
H
h
a
r
When to Use the Recalculate All Option
Sa
290
to
Lesson 12
The Freeze Option

The Freeze option:
Freezes calculations for a specified population.
Causes the Calculate phase to ignore any changes to absence events during the run.
Does not delete unprocessed triggers, so that you can later unfreeze calculations and process the triggers.
Slide 176
to
Student Notes
Freezing and Unfreezing Calculations
e
ens
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
Here are some additional facts about the Freeze option:
a) nt G
c
io a payee
dhasea calculation status of Calculate.
rfor
It applies only when each calculation
u
a
t
t
S
on hisstatus
It does not affect payees @
with a selection
of Suspend or Cancel.
t
e
h
e
soption when Freeze is selected, the system processes all triggers.
h All
u
If you run thera
Recalculate
(sa
e
hH
You can freeze or unfreeze all payees that are in the current process stream, group list, or calendar group ID
or you can freeze selected payees on the Payee Status page.
ra
Sa
291
Lesson 12
The Suspend Options

A payee can only be identified in one open calendar group at a time.
You can temporarily suspend payees from a calendar group in order to process them with another calendar
group.
The Suspend option pulls payees from the current absence run.
The Suspend Active option pulls payees from other open calendar groups in order to process them in the
current run.
Slide 177
Student Notes
e
ens
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
Suspending Payees
no
a
s of uUnprocessed.
Suspended payees are given an iterative trigger with aastatus
de
i
h
)
are-identifies
t Gand re-calculates the suspended payees.
c
Once you return to the open pay run, the o
system
n
e
ari Stud
t
n
o his
@
t
e
h
e
s
u
ah
r
a
(s
e
H
h
a
r
Sa
292
to
Lesson 12
The Cancel Option

The Cancel option:
Deletes all calculations for cancelled payees, sets the Selection status to Cancelled, and deletes the
Calculation status.
Deletes all error messages, warnings, and audit messages.
Causes canceled payees to be ignored during future iterations of processing, including retroactive runs,
unless you manually un-cancel them.
Can be run for an entire absence run or for individual payees from a calendar group.
Cannot be run for a finalized calendar group ID.
Slide 178
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
Student Notes
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
Entering Instructions for Canceling oc
ri tude
a
t
You can cancel:
n is S
o
thcheck box on the run control page.
e@thesCancel
h
e
An entire run, by selecting
u
ah
r
a
An individual
(s payee, by setting the Process Indicator for the payee on the Payee Status page to Cancel.
e
H
h
a
ar to Cancel an Entire Run
SWhen
Canceling an entire run is an action that rarely occurs. If, however, a problem is discovered that affects most
or all payees, canceling the run might be the most efficient or only solution.
For example, if the wrong process list was attached to a calendar, or if calendars were added to the calendar
group in the wrong order, you should cancel the run, make the corrections, and run the Identify phase again to
correct each payee.
293
Lesson 12
The Finalize Phase

The Finalize phase:
Closes the calendar group.
Prevents further changes to a calendar run.
Updates the status codes, deletes processing messages, and iterative triggers.
Must be run before you can send absence results to your payroll system.
Cannot be reversed.
Slide 179
Student Notes
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
What Happens During the Finalize Phase
a
h
G of the absence process. When you run the
a) with nthet results
Run the Finalize phase only after you are satisfied
c
e
o
Finalize phase, the system:
ari Stud
t
n
o his to Finalize.
Sets the Calculation status
of each payment
@
t
e
h
e
s
u
Deletes all warnings,
and iterative triggers, including any that were unprocessed.
ah error messages,
r
a
s
e (a finalized timestamp that you can view on the Calendar Group page.
Inserts
H
rah Marks the Calendar Group as Finalized and clears the Open indicator.
a
S
294
Lesson 12
Correcting Errors
If the system runs into problems during the calculate program, the payee is placed in error. Two types of
errors can occur:
e
ens
to
You cannot run the Finalize phase until all errors are resolved.
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
Slide 180
no
a
s uide
a
h
Student Notes
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
Error Statuses
o
e@ se th the system automatically updates the calculation status for the
When an error occursh
during processing,
ah one of uthe following three statuses:
payment by assigning
r
a
(s
e
H
Status
Description
h
a
r
Sa Error
The error occurred as the amount was being calculated.
Example: The batch process was unable to find an appropriate effective-dated
row for an element definition.
Bypassed
The system did not attempt to calculate the payee because of an error.
Example: The system was unable to find the payee's job row.
Error - User
An error condition identified by the organization was met.

Example: A formula element generates an error message when certain
conditions are met.
You can use the Payee Status page to view payees by calculation status and to enter additional processing
instructions.
295
Lesson 12
See Also
Viewing Absence Processing Results, Explaining the Payee Process Stat and Payee Segment Stat Records
Viewing Absence Processing Results, Viewing Online Pages with Processing Results
e
ens
ra
li
e
l
b
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
296
(s
e
H
to
Lesson 12
Viewing Processing Results
Pages for Viewing Results

Use the following resources to review processing statistics, payees placed in error, and other process results:
Resource
Purpose
Log File
Enables the administrator to determine whether a run was

successful.
Processing Statistics page
Provides processing statistics for the run, including the

number of payees that are in error.
Iterative List page
Lists payees for whom the system has performed iterative

calculations.
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
era
f
s
Payee Messages page
Shows error messages
anand warnings.
r
t
on
Payee Status page
Enablesnyou to view the calculation status of payees and
a de instructions for individual payees.
to enter processing
s
a
h Gui
)
a
c dent
o
i
r
Slide 181
nta is Stu
o
e@ se th
Student Notes
h
u
ah
r
a
(s Pages
e
Accessing
Results
H
h
a
r
information from the pages listed above remains available after finalizing a run, except for Payee
Sa All
Messages and Iterative List. When you cancel an entire run, information on all pages is deleted.
Page Used to View Payee Status
You can use the Payee Status page to:
List the payees in a calendar group according to calculation status, pay group, calendar, or other criteria.
Specify the action that the system should take for a payee the next time you run the Calculate phase.
Use this page to view payee status and enter processing instructions for individual payees:
297
Lesson 12
Page Name
Navigation
Payee Status
Global Payroll & Absence Mgmt, Absence and Payroll Processing, Review Absence
Payroll Info, Payee Status, Payee Status
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
)
G
aProcess
t Indicator
c
n
Entering Processing Instructions Using
the
e
o
i tud
aarpayee
t
Sometimes you might need to cancel
n
Sfrom a run, temporarily suspend a payee from processing, freeze
o
s
i
a payee's calculations, or take
some
other
action
at the payee level. You do this by selecting a process
@ th
e
h
e
actionutostake during the next iteration of processing.
indicator to define h
what
a
r
For example,
(saif a payee's selection status is Active and you need to cancel that payee from the run, set the
e
payee's
H process indicator to Cancel. The next time you run the Calculate phase, the system deletes all
h
ra calculation results for that payee and changes the payee's selection status to Cancelled.
Sa
298
Lesson 12
Activity 12: Processing Absences and Reviewing Results


1. Run the absence process.
2. Review the log file.
3. Review payee messages.
4. Review processing statistics.
5. Review the iterative list.
6. Review payee status.
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
Slide 182
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
(s
e
H
299
Lesson 12
Activity Overview
In this activity, you will:
Run the Identify and Calculate phases of the absence process for the Jan 2010 GRP calendar group.
View the following items and compare your results to those shown at the end of the activity:
Log file.
Payee messages.
Processing statistics.
Iterative list.
e
ens
View payee status.
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
300
(s
e
H
to
Lesson 12
Detailed Activity Steps

To run the absence process:
1. Select Global Payroll & Absence Mgmt, Absence and Payroll Processing, Calculate Absence and Payroll.
2. Add a new the run control ID called Absence.
3. Enter the following information on the Calculate Absence and Payroll page:
Page Element
Value or Status
Calendar Group ID
Jan 2010 GRP
Identify
Selected
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
4. Click Run.
a
h
a)OK. nt G
c
5. On the Process Scheduler Request page,

click
rio tude
a
t
nby clicking
6. Access the Process List page
the Process Monitor link.
o
sS
i
@
h
t
he uuntil
ethe status of the process changes to Success.
7. Click Refresh periodically
s
h
a
ar
s
(
ethe Log File
H
Reviewing
rahTo review the log file:
a
S
Calculate
Selected
2. Enter Absence as the run control ID.
3. Click the Process Monitor link on the Calculate Absence and Payroll page.
4. Click the Details link for your instance.
5. Click the View Log/Trace link.
6. Click the link for the log file.
7. Compare the log file to the sample results at the end of this activity.
Log File Results

View the log file:
301
Lesson 12
Log File
e
ens
ra
li
e
l
b
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
302
(s
e
H
to
Lesson 12
Oracle Enterprise Global Payroll and Absence Management - Version 9.0

Copyright (C) 2006 Oracle
All Rights Reserved
Process started
Connecting to Database
with User ID
and Batch Run ID
Calendar Group ID
Process Number
Stream Number
Group List ID
Identify Option
Suspend Active
Calculation Option
Trace Option
Recalculate All
Unfreeze Option
Freeze Option
Finalize Option
Cancel Option
Suspend Option
Off-Cycle Option
Stop Bulk Insert
Identify Interval
Calculate Interval
Progress Interval
Cancel Interval
Processing Payee Range
17:32:21
:
:
HC910001
PS
Absence
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
JAN 2010 GRP

6
0
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
(s
e
H
First Employee ID
Last Employee ID
Initial Phase started
:
:
:
:
Y
N
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
2000
1000
500
2000
:
:
0002
ZPBAT10
17:32:24
303
Lesson 12
Looking for T&L feed
Initial Phase ended

:
17:32:25
Identify Phase started :

17:32:25
Total number of Payees identified :

Total number of Segments identified:
Identify Phase ended

:
17:32:31
Calculate Phase started:

17:32:31
Total number of Payees processed

:
Total number of Segments processed :
Calculate Phase ended :

17:32:36
Process ended
:
17:32:36
COBOL Array usage recorded during this run
2
2
to
2
2
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
e
ens
(s
e
H
rah
a
S To review payee messages:
Reviewing Payee Messages
1. Select Global Payroll & Absence Mgmt, Absence and Payroll Processing, Review Absence/Payroll Info,
Payee Messages.
2. Enter Jan 2010 Grp as the Calendar Group ID.
3. Click the Select Matching Messages button.
4. Compare your results to the sample results.
Reviewing Payee Messages Results

The Payee Messages page should look like this:
304
Lesson 12
e
ens
to
Reviewing Processing Statistics

To review the processing statistics:
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
2. Enter Jan 2010 Grp as the calendar group ID.)
a nt G
c
o
i tude
rresults.
3. Compare your results to the sample
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
Reviewing Processing
u Results
ah Statistics
r
a
(s Group page should look like this:
The By Calendar
e
H
h
a
r
Sa
Processing Statistics.
305
Lesson 12
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
rah List u
Reviewing the s
Iterative
a
e(
ToH
review the iterative list:
rah1. Select Global Payroll & Absence Mgmt, Absence and Payroll Processing, Review Absence/Payroll Info,
a
S
Payee Iterative List.
2. Click Select Payees.
3. Compare your results to the sample results.
Reviewing the Iterative List Results

The Payee Iterative List page should look like this:
306
Lesson 12
Reviewing Payee Status
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
era
f
s
1. Select Global Payroll & Absence Mgmt, Absence and Payroll Processing,
an Review Absence/Payroll Info,
r
t
Payee Status.
on
n
a de
2. Enter Jan 2010 Grp as the calendar group ID.
s
a
h Gui
)
3. Click the Select with Matching Criteria button.
a
c dent
o
i
r
u end of this activity.
4. Compare the results to the sample
at tthe
ntaresults
S
o
s
@ thi
e
h
e
Results
s
h
u
Reviewing Payee Status
a
ar
s
(
The Payee
e Status page should look like this:
H
rah
a
S
To review payee status:
307
Lesson 12
e
ens
ra
li
e
l
b
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
fe
s
n
a
ra
Sa
308
(s
e
H
to
Lesson 12
Review

The rules that you define for a given take element affect what information users can enter when reporting
absences.
Take processing creates a row of daily data for each day of an absence event, applies your absence rules to
calculate paid and unpaid units, and generates positive input that you can send to a payroll system.
You use the Calculate Absence and Payroll page to enter instructions for running the absence process.
When entering processing instructions, you select which phase of the process to run (for example, Identify,
Calculate, or Finalize).
to
e
s
After running the absence process, you should check the Message Log, Payee Messages, and othernonline
ce
pages to ensure that the calculations processed successfully and without errors.
i
l
le
b
a
er
Slide 183
f
s
an
r
t
Student Notes
on
n
a de
s
a
h Gui
)
a
c dent
o
i
r
This table lists additional resourcestthat
more
u details about the topics that we have discussed in this
a provide
t
n
S
lesson:
o his
@
t
e
h
e
s
u See
ah
Topic
r
a
(s
e
H event entry
Absence
PeopleSoft Enterprise Absence Management 9.1 PeopleBook, "Entering
h
Absences," Entering, Updating and Voiding Absence Events
a
r
Sa
Running the absence process
PeopleSoft Enterprise Absence Management 9.1 PeopleBook, "Processing

Absences," Entering Processing Instructions
Daily data

Absences," The Take Process
Stream processing

Absences," Creating Process Streams
Group lists

Absences," Creating Group Lists
Element resolution chain

Absences," Entering Processing Instructions
Viewing processing results
PeopleSoft Enterprise Absence Management 9.1 PeopleBook, "Viewing and

Finalizing Absence Results," Viewing Absence Processing Results
309
ra
Sa
fe
s
n
a
ra
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
h
(s
e
H
li
e
l
b
e
ens
to
Lesson 13
Viewing Absence Processing Results

Objectives
Identify the result tables.
View online pages with processing results.
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
Slide 185
to
li
e
l
b
Explain the Payee Process Stat and Payee Segment Stat records.
ra
Sa
e
ens
(s
e
H
311
Lesson 13
Identifying the Result Tables
Result Tables
Absence processing generates a set of tables that store the results for:
Earnings and deductions
Accumulators
Other elements
Positive input data
Positive input supporting element overrides
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
Student Notes
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
Using Data in the Result Tables n
o his S
@
t the results:
etables that
This diagram shows the
store
h
e
s
u
ah
r
a
(s
e
H
h
a
r
Sa
312
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
Absence daily data

Slide 186
e
ens
to
Lesson 13
to
e
ens
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
(s
e
H
Once you know the exact type of information that resides in the output tables, you can use the tables to
produce reports and other data manipulations that are relevant to your organization's needs.
Store Options and Result Tables

The resolved values that are written to the result tables depend on the Store options that you selected on the
element name page:
Additional Information About Stored Results

This table provides additional information about stored results for accumulators and other supporting
elements.
313
Lesson 13
Element
Where Stored
Result Table
Accumulators
Resolved values for accumulators are stored on a

separate Accumulator Result table.
GP_RSLT_ACUM
The system stores balances for only those accumulators

that are in effect as of the period begin date and those for
which the user has specified a longer storage period
through the accumulator definition.
Supporting Elements
All supporting elements, such as variables, formulas,

dates, durations, and system elements, are stored in a
separate result table.
GP_RSLT_PIN
e
ens
ra
li
e
l
b
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
314
(s
e
H
to
Lesson 13
Explaining the Payee Process Stat and Payee Segment Stat Records
Payee Process Stat Record

Payee Process Stat records, created during the Identify phase, are the highest level of data that is stored in the
output result structure:
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
Student Notes
h
a) nt G
c
io tude
r
a
t
Characteristics of Payee Process
n StatisRecords
S
o
@
h
t
The system creates one
record for each EmplID (employee ID), EmplRcd (employee
e Process
e Statgroup
hPayee
s
h
record), calendaragroup,
and calendar/pay
combination.
u
r
a
(s
e
H
h
a
r
Sa
Slide 187
315
Lesson 13
Explaining the Payee Process Stat and Payee Segment Stat Records
(continued)
Payee Segment Stat Record
Payee Segment Stat records, also created during the Identify phase, are the second highest level of data that is
stored in the output result table structure:
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
Slide 188
e@ se th
h
h
u
Student Notesara
(s
e
H
h
a
Characteristics
of Payee Segment Stat Records
r
Sa Here are some characteristics of the Payee Segment Stat record:
The system creates one Payee Segment Stat record for each segment that is calculated for each EmplID
(employee ID), EmplRcd (employee record), calendar group, and calendar/pay group combination.
If multiple segment calculations occur for a single processing period, the system creates multiple Payee
Segment Stat records, but only one Payee Process Stat record.
The calculation status indicates the status of an individual calculation for a payee.
The system updates the status during the calculation process. The status cannot be manually updated.
Example: Multiple Segments

Assume that a payee changes companies on March 15, 2010 and you want separate entitlement calculations
for the time period that she was in each company. You would have two Payee Segment Stat records with the
following segment dates:
316
Lesson 13
EmplID (employee ID)
Segment #
Segment From Date
Segment To Date
111
March 1, 20101
March 14, 2010
111
March 15, 2010
March 31, 2010
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
(s
e
H
317
Lesson 13
Viewing Online Pages with Processing Results
Components with Processing Results

These components display processing results:
to
Slide 189
Student Notes
e
ens
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
Results Components
s uide
a
h
This table provides a brief description of the components
Gviewing processing results:
a) nfor
t
c
rio tude
a
t
Component Name
n is SPurpose
o
he@use th For the payee and calendar group that you specify, these pages show
Results by Calendarh
Group
you the amounts that were calculated for accumulators and
ra
a
s
supporting elements. You can also see daily data, units generated for
(
e
earnings and deductions, and other information.
H
h
ra
These pages display the same information as the Results by Calendar
Sa Results by Calendar
Group pages, but for a specific calendar.
318
Lesson 13
Viewing Online Pages with Processing Results (continued)
Results by Calendar Group Pages

Each time you run the Calculate phase, you can view a payee's calculations, including:
Type of Information
Page
Segmentation information
Calendar Group Results
Entitlement balances
Accumulators
Supporting elements, including entitlement units
Supporting Elements
Daily data generated by the Take process
Absence Data
Balance adjustments to frequency-based entitlement
Positive Input
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
Units generated for earnings and deductions
Generatedo
n Positive Input
a
s uide
a
h
Slide 190
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
Student Notes
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
uGroup Results
aCalendar
r
Pages Used to View
a
s
e (pages
UseHthese
to view calendar group results.
h
ra
Sa
319
Lesson 13
Use this page to view segmentation information for a payee:

Page Name
Navigation
Global Payroll and Absence Mgmt, Absence and Payroll Processing, Review
Absence/Payroll Info, Results by Calendar Group, Calendar Group Results
e
ens
ra
li
e
l
b
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
320
(s
e
H
to
Lesson 13
Use this page to view entitlement balances:

Page Name
Navigation
Accumulators
Absence/Payroll Info, Results by Calendar Group, Accumulators
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
(s
e
H
321
Lesson 13
Use this page to view results for supporting elements:

Page Name
Navigation
Supporting Elements
Absence/Payroll Info, Results by Calendar Group, Supporting Elements
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
Use this page to view daily data:
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
nNavigation
Page Name
o
sS
i
@
h
t
e sClick
e the Absence Data link on the Calendar Group Results page.
Absence Data hh
u
a
ar
s
(
e
H
h
ra
Sa
Note. The Results by Calendar component provides information that is similar to the Results by Calendar
Group component.
322
Lesson 13
Activity 13: Viewing Processing Results

In this activity, you will review the activity overview and view the results of the absence process.
Slide 191
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
(s
e
H
323
Lesson 13
Activity Overview
In this activity, you will review the following processing results for the employee ID provided by your
instructor:
Calendar group results

Accumulators
Supporting elements
Absence data
Review the processing results for the same employee that you used in when you entered in absence event
earlier:
Payroll System
Employee ID
KUL601 (Reggie)
Payroll Interface
K0LA01 (Ted)
324
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
u
ah
r
a
(s
e
H
h
a
r
Sa
e
ens
to
Lesson 13
Viewing Results
To view the results:
1. Select Global Payroll & Absence Mgmt, Absence and Payroll Processing, Review Absence Payroll Info,
Results by Calendar Group.
2. Enter the following information on the Results by Calendar Group search page:
Page Element
Value or Status
Empl ID
KUL601 {Reggie} (for PNA)

OR
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
K0LA01 {Ted} (for PI)
e
ens
tr
n
Calendar Group ID
Jan 2010
noGrp
a
s uide
a
3. Click the Search button
h
a) nt G
c
4. Compare the following result pagesrifor

o the employee
de you entered, to those shown in the Results section:
u
a
t
t
n is S
Calendar Group Results o
e@ se th
h
Accumulators
u
ah
r
a
(s Elements
e
Supporting
H
h
a
Absence Data
r
Sa
Note. To access this page, return to the Calendar Group Results page and click the Absence Data link.
Results
This section shows processing results.
The Calendar Group Results page should look like this:
325
Lesson 13
Accumulators
The Accumulators page should look like this:
e
ens
ra
li
e
l
b
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
(s
e
H
Supporting Elements
The Supporting Elements page should look like this:
326
to
Lesson 13
e
ens
to
ra
fe
s
n
a
Absence Data
li
e
l
b
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
The Absence Data page should look like this:
ra
Sa
(s
e
H
Note. To access this page, click the Absence Data link at the bottom of the Calendar Group Results page.
327
Lesson 13
Review

The absence process produces a set of result tables that store the processing results.
The Identify phase of processing produces one Payee Process Stat record for each EmplID, EmplRcd,
calendar group, and calendar/pay group combination.
The Results by Calendar Group component and the Results by Calendar component contain pages for
reviewing a payee's processing results.
Slide 192
Student Notes
e
ens
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
Topic
See
a) nt G
c
deAbsence Management 9.1 PeopleBook, "Introducing the

rio Enterprise
u
a
Output tables
PeopleSoft
t
t
nCore Application
o
s S Architecture," Batch Architecture Process Flow
i
@
h
t
he usePeopleSoft Enterprise Absence Management 9.1 PeopleBook, "Viewing and
h
Payee status
ra
a
Finalizing Absence Results," Viewing Payee Status and Updating a Payee's
s
(
Processing Instructions
e
H
rah
lesson:
Sa
328
Viewing results online
PeopleSoft Enterprise Absence Management 9.1 PeopleBook, "Viewing and

Finalizing Absence Results," Viewing Results by Calendar
to
Lesson 14
Controlling Processing Results

Objectives
Define rounding rules.
Explain generation control.
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
Slide 194
to
li
e
l
b
Describe frequency conversion.
ra
Sa
e
ens
(s
e
H
329
Lesson 14
Defining Rounding Rules
Rounding Rules
For calculations that resolve to a numeric value, you may need to round that value.
Here are some common characteristics of rounding:
Rounded values are stored or used in other calculations.
Rounding enables you to systematically change values according to predefined rules.
Assign rounding rules directly to an entitlement element or apply the pay group's rounding rule to
entitlement.
The system displays six decimal places by default, with no rounding.

Slide 195
e
ens
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
Page Used to Define Rounding Rules
a) nt G
c
e
Use this page to define rounding rules
dvalues:
rforionumeric
u
a
t
t
n is S
o
th
e@ Navigation
Page Name
h
e
s
u
ah
r
a
Rounding(Rules
s - Definition Set Up HRMS, Product Related, Global Payroll & Absence Mgmt, Elements,
e
Supporting Elements, Rounding Rules, Definition
H
h
ra
Sa
Student Notes
330
to
Lesson 14
Defining Rounding Rules (continued)
Rounding Defaults for Pay Groups and Formulas

When you define a pay group:
If the same rounding rule applies to more then one entitlement element, you can select a default rounding
rule for a pay group.
You can select no rounding, or specify a rounding rule for absence elements.
When you define a formula:
to
If the field format of the selected element is Decimal, Monetary, or Pointer, you can select a rounding rule
from the list.
e
ens
li
e
l
b
The rounding rule applies only to the operand for which you've entered it. The element itself isn't updated;
only the calculation is affected.
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
Student Notes
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
deRule for a Pay Group

rioRounding
Example: Page Used to Select Default
u
a
t
t
on hProduct
s S Related, Global Payroll & Absence Mgmt, Framework,
i
Use the Defaults page (Set@
Up HRMS,
t
he Defaults)
e to define default rounding, proration, and frequency conditions for a
Organizational, Pay
Groups,
s
h
u
a
pay group. ar
(s
e
This
example
shows the Rounding Option - Unit field that you can use to define a default rule rounding rule
H
h
ra for entitlement units:
Sa
Slide 196
331
Lesson 14
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
o and amount do not apply.
npercent,
Note. In Absence Management, rounding options for base, a
rate,
e
s
d
a
i
h Gu
)
a
nt for a Formula
c deRule
o
i
Example: Page Used to Select Default
Rounding
r
ta Stu
n(click
o
Use the Element Attributes page
Element
is Attributes button on the Formulas - Field-by-Field Definition
@
h
t
e
page) to assign a rounding
rule
and
element
pointer selection to the field in your formula.
h use
h
ra
a
This example
shows the Rounding Rule Element field that you can use to define a default rule rounding rule
s
for formula
e ( units:
H
rah
a
S
332
Lesson 14
Describing Frequency Conversion
Defining Frequencies and Annualization Factors

Frequencies in Human Resources have an associated frequency annualization factor. For example:
Frequency
Frequency Annualization Factor
Annual
Monthly
12
Weekly
52
e
ens
to
Slide 197
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
Page Used to View and Define Annualization Factors
h
a)factor nfort aG
c
Use this page to view and enter an annualization

frequency:
e
o
i
d
r
nta is Stu
o
Page Name
@ Navigation
th
e
h
e
s
uSet Up HRMS, Foundation Tables, Compensation Rules, Frequency Table,
ah
Frequency Table
r
a
Frequency Table
(s
e
H
h
a
r
Sa
Student Notes
333
Lesson 14
Describing Frequency Conversion (continued)
Uses of Frequency in Absence Management

In Absence Management, frequency is used with:
Entitlement elements
Generation control
Calendar periods
Slide 198
e
ens
ra
li
e
l
b
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
334
(s
e
H
to
Lesson 14
Annualization and Deannualization Formulas

Human Resources and Absence Management use the same frequency formulas:
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
Slide 199
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
(s
e
H
335
Lesson 14
Annualizing and Deannualizing Frequency-Based Entitlement

During the Calculate phase of processing, the system use these formulas to annualize and deannualize
frequency-based entitlement:
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
Slide 200
e@ se th
h
u
Student Notesarah
(s
e
H
h
a
Example:
Annualizing and Deannualizing Entitlement
r
Sa Assume that you create a frequency-based entitlement element that accrues 20 days of entitlement each year.
The frequency ID is annual. In Human Resources, an annual frequency has a frequency factor of 1.
The annualized entitlement amount = 20 x 1 = 20 days.
During absence processing, the system deannualizes the entitlement based on the calendar period frequency,
provided there is no generation control frequency. If the calendar period frequency were monthly, the system
would deannualize the entitlement as follows:
20 days / 12 = 1.66667
The payee would accrue 1.6667 days of entitlement each month.
Note. If you specify a generation control frequency for the entitlement, the system uses that frequency (rather
than the calendar period frequency) to deannualize the entitlement.
Example: Defining Frequency for Calendar Periods

The Periods page defines the frequency for the calendar period:
336
Lesson 14
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
(s
e
H
337
Lesson 14
Explaining Generation Control
Generation Control Parameters

You can use the following generation control parameters to exclude or include an element during batch
processing.
HR status
HR action/reason
Segment status
Frequency
to
Formula
Run type
e
ens
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
Student Notes
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
io tuPayees
de Only
rActive
Example: Processing an Element for
a
t
na particular
o
s Selement for all payees with an HR status of Active. To do this,
i
Assume that you want to process
@
h
t
e element
you create a generation
hcontrol
e that includes all payees with an HR Status of Active. You then
s
h
u
a
associate this element
with
the
element
that you want to control. During the batch process, the system
r
aelement
s
processes(the
for active payees only.
e
H
rah
a
SPage Used to Define Generation Control Conditions
Slide 201
Use this page to define criteria for including or excluding certain element conditions during batch processing:
338
Lesson 14
Page Name
Navigation
Conditions
Supporting Elements, Generation Control, Conditions
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
Note. When you enter more than one generation control parameter, such as HR Status and Frequency, the
employee must meet both criteria to pass generation control. When you enter more than one value for a
particular generation control type, such as an Action of Hire and Rehire, the employee must meet only one of
the criteria to pass generation control.
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
(s
e
H
339
Lesson 14
Explaining Generation Control (continued)
Including or Excluding Employee Status Conditions

To set up generation control based on employee status, specify:
Whether to include or exclude the statuses.
Which statuses to include or exclude.
Which Job Data rows to check for the selected status code:
All Job Data rows in effect during the period.
The last Job Data row in effect during the period.
Slide 202
Student Notes
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
sConditions
Page Used to Exclude or Include Employee Status
de
a
i
h
u
a) conditions
t G during batch processing:
Use this page to exclude or include employee
status
c
n
e
o
ari Stud
t
n
o his
@
t
e
h
e
s
u
ah
r
a
(s
e
H
h
a
r
Sa
340
e
ens
to
Lesson 14
Page Name
Navigation
HR Status for Element ()
Click the HR Status link on the Conditions page.
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
he@uUsing
e thEmployee Status
Example: GenerationhControl
s
arahas the following PS_JOB rows:
Assume a(payee
s
e
H
HR Employee Status
rahEffective Date
a
S
January 1, 2010
Active
January 10, 2010
Leave of Absence
January 20, 2010
Active
Also assume that elements E1 and E2 have these generation control conditions applied to them through the
use of the HR Status page controls:
Element
Include/Exclude
Employee Status
All Job Records in

Segment
Last Job Record
E1
Include
Leave of Absence
No
Yes
E2
Include
Leave of Absence
Yes
No
If you are processing for the month of January 2010, the results will be as follows:
341
Lesson 14
E1 will not be processed because the last Job row is not Leave of Absence.
E2 will be processed because the Job row with Leave of Absence is within the segment.
e
ens
ra
li
e
l
b
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
342
(s
e
H
to
Lesson 14
Including or Excluding Action/Reason Codes

To set up generation control based on action/reason codes in Job data, specify:
Whether to include or exclude the action/reason codes.
Whether to use the last day worked when checking action/reason codes.
One or more Action codes.
A Reason code associated with each action (optional).
e
ens
The system includes or excludes all reasons associated with the selected action if you do not specify a
reason.
to
ra
fe
s
n
a
Slide 203
li
e
l
b
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
Page Used to Include or Exclude Action/Reason
a) Codes
tG
c
n
e
o
Use this page to exclude or include Action/Reason
ari Studcode combinations:
t
n
o his
@
t
e
h
e
s
u
ah
r
a
(s
e
H
h
a
r
Sa
Student Notes
343
Lesson 14
Page Name
Navigation
HR Action/Reason for Element

()
Click the Action/Reason link on the Conditions page.
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
(s
e
H
Note. If you enter an action with no reason, the system assumes that all reasons are valid. All PS_JOB rows
are considered for a given segment. The PS_JOB row must have an effective date within the segment to be
considered.
Example: Generation Control Using Action/Reason Codes

Assume the payee has the following PS_JOB rows:
Effective Date
Action
Reason
January 1, 2000
Hire
New Position
Also assume that element E1 has this generation control condition applied to it, through the use of the HR
Action/Reason page controls:
344
Lesson 14
Element
Include/Exclude
Action
Reason
E1
Include
Hire
New Position
If you are processing for the month of January 2007, E1 will not be processed because the PS_JOB row did
not have an effective date within the segment.
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
(s
e
H
345
Lesson 14
Including or Excluding Frequency Codes, Formulas, and Run Types

To set up generation control based on frequency codes, formulas, or run types, specify:
Whether to include or exclude the frequency, formula, or run type.
Which frequency codes, formulas, or run types to include or exclude.
Slide 204
Student Notes
e
ens
to
Page Used to Include or Exclude Frequency Codes

Use this page to exclude or include frequency codes:
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
Page Name
Navigation
no
a
s uide
a
h
Frequency for Element ()
Set Up HRMS, Product
Related,G
Global Payroll & Absence Mgmt, Elements,
a) Generation
t
c
Supporting Elements,
Control, Conditions
n
e
o
i
d
r
Clickta
tulink on the Conditions page.
n the Frequency
S
o
s
@ thi
e
h
e
s
h
u
a
ar
s
(
e
H
h
ra
Sa
Example: Using Frequency Generation Control

Say that you have a weekly pay period, and you want a particular entitlement to resolve the first pay period of
the month. You want to use the same process list for all four weekly runs during the month.
To avoid having to create a new process list just to accommodate your needs for the first period of the month,
you can use the frequency generation control feature to define a frequency with a first of the month value.
You can then use the same process list for all four periods and confine the particular entitlement processing to
the first period of the month.
346
Lesson 14
Page Used to Include or Exclude Formulas

Page Name
Navigation
Formula for Element ()
Click the Formula link on the Conditions page.
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
Use this page to exclude or include run types:
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
Page Name
Navigation
rio tude
a
t
nUp HRMS,
o
s SProduct Related, Global Payroll & Absence Mgmt, Elements,
Run Type for Element ()
Set
i
@
h
t
he uSupporting
e Elements, Generation Control, Conditions
s
h
a
Click the Run Type link on the Conditions page.
ar
s
(
e
H
h
Page Used to Include or Exclude Run Types
ra
Sa
347
Lesson 14
Including or Excluding Segment Status Conditions

To set up generation control based on the condition of a segment status, specify:
Whether to include or exclude the segment status condition.
The condition to include or exclude:
Active in Segment
Inactive in Segment
Slide 205
Student Notes
ra
348
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
Use this page to exclude or include segment status conditions
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
Page Name
Navigation
rio tude
a
t
nUp HRMS,
o
s SProduct Related, Global Payroll & Absence Mgmt, Elements,
i
Segment Status for Element ()
Set
@
h
t
he uSupporting
e Elements, Generation Control, Conditions
s
h
a
Click the Segment Status link on the Conditions page.
ar
s
(
e
H
h
Page Used to Include or Exclude Segment Status
Sa
e
ens
to
Lesson 14
Activity 14: Managing Entitlement Resolution With

Generation Control
1. Define a generation control element that is based on a formula.
2. Modify an entitlement element to use generation control.
3. Run the absence process and review the results.
Slide 206
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
(s
e
H
349
Lesson 14
Activity Overview
In this activity, you will modify the entitlement rule for floating holidays to specify that entitlement resolve in
January of each year.

Create a generation control element called January Float, that uses the formula element, GP JANUARY, to
detect when the January calendar is processed.
Modify the Float Ent entitlement element by changing the frequency to monthly and selecting the
generation control element.
Run the absence process.
to
View results for accumulators and supporting elements for the employee ID you used in earlier activities:
Payroll System
Employee ID
KUL601 (Reggie)
ra
350
K0LA01 (Ted)
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
e
s
a
Note. Use PS for the user name and password in this
activity.uid
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
u
ah
r
a
(s
e
hH
Payroll Interface
Sa
e
ens
Lesson 14
Defining Generation Control

To define generation control:
Generation Control.
3. Enter the following information on the Generation Control Name page:
Value or Status
Name
January Float
to
li
e
l
b
ra
sfe
n
Description
January FloatingaHolidays
tr
n
no
Results - Store
Deselect
a
s uide
a
h
4. Access the Conditions page and enter the following
a) ninformation.
tG
c
e
o
ri tud
a
t
n
Page Element
Value or Status
o his S
@
t
e se
Effective Date hh
January 1, 2010
u
a
r
saFormula link on the Conditions page.
(the
5. Click
e
hH
ra 6.
Sa
Page Element
e
ens
Select GP JANUARY as the Formula Name.
7. Click OK.
8. Click Save.
Modifying the Entitlement Element

To modify the entitlement FLOAT ENT element:
351
Lesson 14
2. Enter the following information on the Absence Entitlements Search page:

Page Element
Value or Status
Element Name
Float Ent
Correct History
Select
3. Click the Search button.

5. Change the frequency ID to M (monthly).
6. Select January Float in the Entitlement Generation Control Element field.
e
ens
7. Click Save.
to

ra
fe
s
n
a
r
t
n
1. Select Global Payroll & Absence Mgmt, Absence and PayrolloProcessing, Calculate Absence and Payroll.
n
a
s uide
2. Select Absence as the run control ID.
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
Page Element
Value or Status
@
h
t
e
h use
h
a
Calendar Group
ID
JAN 2010 GRP
r
a
s
e(
4. H
Select the Calculate and Recalculate All options.
h
ra 5.
Sa
li
e
l
b
Click Run.
6. On the Process Scheduler Request page, click OK.

7. Click the Process Monitor link.
8. Click Refresh periodically until the status of the process changes to Success.
Viewing the Results

2. Select the employee ID you used in earlier activities: _________.
This is the same employee that you used in the previous activity.
3. Enter Jan 2010 Grp as the calendar group ID.
352
Lesson 14
4. Click the Absence Data link at the bottom of the Calendar Group Results page to access the Absence Data
page.
Compare your results to the Absence Data page shown in the Results section.
5. Click the Return to Main Result Pages link and select the Accumulators page.
Compare the results shown on the Accumulators page and the Supporting Elements page to the pages
shown in the Results section.
Results
Absence Data
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
(s
e
H
Accumulators
353
Lesson 14
e
ens
ra
li
e
l
b
tr
n
no
The Supporting Elements page should look like this:
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
u
ah
r
a
(s
e
hH
Supporting Elements
ra
Sa
354
fe
s
n
a
to
Lesson 14
Review

You can define rounding rules for entitlement units.
Absence Management uses the same Frequency table as Human Resources for annualization and
deannualization.
Generation control elements enable you to tell the system whether to process an element based on criteria
that you define, such as HR status, HR Action/Reason, segment status, frequency, formula, or run type.
Slide 207
Student Notes
to
e
ens
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
Topic
See
a) nt G
c
deAbsence Management 9.1 PeopleBook, "Defining

rio Enterprise
u
a
Rounding rules
PeopleSoft
t
t
nCalculation
o
s SElements," Defining Rounding Rule Elements
i
@
h
t
he usePeopleSoft Enterprise Absence Management 9.1 PeopleBook, "Using
h
Frequency conversions
ra
a
Frequencies," Defining a Frequency
s
(
e
PeopleSoft Enterprise Absence Management 9.1 PeopleBook, "Defining Earning
H
h
and Deduction Elements," Defining Earning Elements
ra
lesson:
Sa

Creating Periods
Generation control

Calculation Elements," Defining Generation Control Elements
355
ra
Sa
fe
s
n
a
ra
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
h
(s
e
H
li
e
l
b
e
ens
to
Lesson 15

Objectives
List the types of supporting elements that you can override.
Explain the element override hierarchy.
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
Slide 209
to
li
e
l
b
Explain where to create supporting element overrides.
ra
Sa
e
ens
(s
e
H
357
Lesson 15
Listing the Types of Supporting Elements that You Can Override
Supporting Element Overrides

You can override the values of the following supporting elements:
Brackets
Dates
Durations
Formulas
Variables
Slide 210
358
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
e
ens
(s
e
H
to
Lesson 15
Explaining Where to Create Supporting Element Overrides
Override Levels
You can override supporting elements at these levels:
Pay entity
Pay group
Payee
Calendar
Via elements
to
Element definition
Slide 211
e
ens
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
Student Notes
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
Example: Enabling Overrides
c
io tude
r
a
t
Use the Override Levels group box
n on theisElement
S Name page to specify which types of overrides are
o
allowed for a particular element:
e@ se th
h
u
ah
r
a
(s
e
H
h
a
r
Sa
359
Lesson 15
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
Overrides Via Elements
c
e
rio tudlearned
In the lesson Setting Up Supportingta
Elements, you
that you can create a formula that assigns a value
n Other
S
o
to itself or another supporting element.
elements,
such
as brackets, dates, and arrays can also assign a
s
i
@
h
t
e
value to another supporting
element.
h use
h
a
arelement value that you want to assigntypically a variablemust be defined with an
The supporting
s
(
override
e level of Via Elements.
H
rahSee Also
a
S
360
Lesson 15

(continued)
Overriding Supporting Elements at the Pay Entity Level
Use the following steps to override supporting elements at the pay entity level on the Pay Entities Supporting Element Overrides page:
1. Select the elements to override brackets, dates, durations, formulas, or variables.
2. Enter a begin date and an optional end date for the override.
3. Enter the override value of each selected element on the Values tab.
to
e
ens
The Values tab appears after you select the element to override.
li
e
l
b
ra
Slide 212
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
Page Used to Override Supporting Elements)at the Pay
a nt G Entity Level
c
e formula, or variable elements that are associated

Use this page to override the value of bracket,
dduration,
rio date,
u
a
t
t
with a specified pay entity:
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
Page Name
uNavigation
ah
r
a
(sElement Overrides Set Up HRMS, Product Related, Global Payroll & Absence Mgmt, Framework,
e
Supporting
H
Organizational, Pay Entities, Supporting Element Overrides
h
a
r
Sa
Student Notes
Example: Overriding Supporting Elements for Pay Entities

Suppose you have an entitlement element, E1, which uses a variable, VR1, to retrieve entitlement. VR1 is
defined as equal to 20, but for Pay Entity A, you want VR1 to equal 22.
On the Elements/Dates tab, you select Variable as the Element Type, enter VR1 for the Element Name, and
enter a begin date. On the Values tab, enter 22 in the Numeric Value field.
361
Lesson 15

(continued)
Conditions for Applying Supporting Element Overrides at the Pay Entity Level
To determine whether to apply the override, the system compares the override's begin and end dates to the
supporting element's definition as of date:
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
Slide 213
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
Student Notes
u
ah
r
a
(s
e
Rules forHApplying an Override
rahTo apply the override, the override must:
a
S
Begin on or before the supporting element's definition as of date.
End on or after the supporting element's definition as of date.
Definition As Of Dates
You define an element's definition as of date on the Element Name page. The definition as of date can be the
same as one of the following:
Calendar period begin date
Calendar period end date
Payment date
Process begin date
Process end date
362
Lesson 15

(continued)
Overriding Supporting Elements at the Pay Group Level
Override supporting elements at the pay group level on the Pay Groups - Supporting Element Overrides page:
This page works in the same way as the Pay Entities - Supporting Element Overrides page.
The processing rules are the same as the rules for pay entity overrides.
Slide 214
Student Notes
e
ens
to
ra
fe
s
n
a
Page Used to Override Supporting Elements at the Pay Group Level
li
e
l
b
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
Page Name
Navigation
a) nt G
c
io tude
r
a
t
Supporting Element Overrides Set
nUp HRMS,
SProduct Related, Global Payroll & Absence Management,
o
s
Framework,
Organizational, Pay Groups, Supporting Element Overrides
i
e@ se th
h
u
ah
r
a
(s
e
hH
Use this page to override the value of bracket, date, duration, formula, or variable elements that are associated
with a specified pay group:
ra
Sa
363
Lesson 15

(continued)
Overriding Supporting Elements at the Payee Level
Override the value of a supporting element wherever it is resolved for a payee on the Supporting Elements
page.
For processing payee overrides, the system:
Does not use the definition as of date.
Uses the segment end dates (or period dates if there is no segmentation) to determine if a supporting
element override is used.
e
ens
to
Slide 215
Student Notes
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
e
s Payee
Page Used to Override Supporting Elements at the
dLevel
a
i
h
u
) duration,
adate,
Use this page to override the value of bracket,
t Gformula, or variable elements that are associated
c
n
e
o
with a particular payee:
ari Stud
t
n
o his
@
t
Page Name
Navigation
e
h
e
s
u
ah
r
a
Supporting
Elements
Global Payroll & Absence Mgmt, Payee Data, Create Overrides, Supporting
(s
Elements, Supporting Elements
e
H
rah
a
S
364
Lesson 15

(continued)
Overriding Supporting Elements for a Calendar
Override supporting elements for a calendar on the Calendars - Supporting Element Overrides page:
You do not define begin and end dates for the override; the override is applied automatically.
List the elements to override and the override values on the Element Overrides tab.
Slide 216
Student Notes
Page Used to Override Supporting Elements for a Calendar
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
Page Name
Navigation
a
h
a) nt G
c
eRelated, Global Payroll & Absence Mgmt, Framework,

Supporting Element Overrides Set Up HRMS,
Product
dSupporting
rioCalendars,
u
a
t
t
Calendars,
Element Overrides
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
u
ah
r
a
(s
e
hH
Use this page to override a supporting element for a calendar:
ra
Sa
365
Lesson 15

(continued)
Overriding Supporting Elements at the Element Definition Level
The following steps illustrate how to override a supporting element at the element definition level on the
Supporting Element Overrides page in the Absence Takes or the Absence Entitlements component:
1. Select the element to override.
2. Enter a begin date and an optional end date for the override.
3. Enter the override value on the Values tab.
li
e
l
b
Slide 217
Student Notes
e
ens
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no Entitlement
Page Used to Override a Supporting Element for an a
Absence
s uelement:
de
a
i
Use this page to override supporting elements for anhentitlement
a) nt G
c
rio tude
Page Name
Navigation
a
t
n is S
o
@ Set uptHRMS,
h Product Related, Global Payroll & Absence Mgmt, Elements,
Absence Entitlement - he
e
s
Supporting Element
ahOverrides uAbsence Elements, Absence Entitlements, Supporting Element Overrides
r
a
(s
e
Absence
Take - Supporting
H
Element Overrides
Absence Elements, Absence Takes, Supporting Element Overrides
h
a
r
Sa
366
to
Lesson 15
Explaining the Element Override Hierarchy
Element Override Hierarchy

When you enter override instructions at more than one level, the system uses a hierarchy to determine which
instructions take precedence.
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
Slide 218
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ah
(s
e
H
ar
Notes
SStudent
Supporting Element Override Hierarchy
The hierarchy varies depending on whether a formula (via element assignment) or other assigning element is
resolved prior to the resolution of a take or entitlement element or if it's resolved as part of the take or
entitlement element.
Via Element Overrides

The Via Elements override level enables you to update an element with another element.
There is no single overrides page that is designed specifically for Via Element overrides. Instead, there are
four places in the system where you can update an element with another element:
367
Lesson 15
Supporting Element
Where to Enter Update Instructions
Bracket
Return Column fields on the Bracket - Search Keys/Return Columns page
Array
Fields in the Map Retrieved Fields to Variable Elements grid on the Array Field Map and Keys page
Date
Date extract fields on the Date Extract page
Formula
Assign To fields on the Field-by-Field Definition page
In these four areas, the system not only checks the User Rules Profile and element usage security, it also
ensures that you can select only from those elements that have an override level of Via Elements.
e
ens
ra
li
e
l
b
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
368
(s
e
H
to
Lesson 15
Explaining the Element Override Hierarchy (continued)
Begin and End Dates

This table summarizes the affect of begin and end dates on supporting element overrides:
Override Level
Begin/End Dates Apply?
Pay entity and pay group
Yes
Payee
Yes
Calendar
No
Element Definition
No
Via Element Assignment
No
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
Slide 219
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
Student Notes
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
Begin and End Dates with Supporting
@ th Element Overrides
e
h
seapplies for a calculation depends on the level of the override. At some
h override
u
Determining ifraa
specific
levels, override
sa begin and end dates help determine whether the override is in effect. At other levels, begin
(
e
andH
end dates are not used. These factors must be considered in conjunction with the override hierarchy to
h
determine
if an override should be applied.
ra
a
S
Override Level
Begin/End
Dates Apply?
Explanation
Pay entity and pay

group
Yes
The system compares the supporting element's definition as of date to the

override begin and end dates to see if the override was in effect on the
definition as of date.
Payee
Yes
The system compares the segment end date to the override begin and end
dates to see if the override was in effect on the segment end date.
Calendar
No
Override is automatically used for all payees in the calendar.
Element Definition
No
This override is only in effect for a specific take or entitlement element

resolution. After that, the supporting element is reset to its previous value.
Via Element
Assignment
No
The override is in effect until the supporting element is either recalculated

(the Always Recalculate check box on the Element Name page is selected),
or is overwritten elsewhere.
369
Lesson 15
Review

You can override the values of these supporting elements: brackets, dates, durations, formulas, and
variables.
You can override a supporting element at various levels: pay entity, pay group, payee, pay calendar, via
elements, element definition, and through positive input.
If multiple sets of override instructions exist for the same supporting element and pay period, the system
refers to a hierarchy to determine which instructions take precedence.
Slide 220
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
Student Notes
ra
Setup Considerations for Supporting Element Overrides
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
Consider the following before setting up supporting element overrides:
no
a
s uide
The level at which the supporting element shouldh
beaoverridden.
)
G
a
t the
c
n
If you override the supporting elementio

at different levels,
system applies only one set of instructions.
e
d
r
u
a
t
t
n is S
o
Additional Resources he@ e th
s
h
u
a
r
This table lists
additional
resources
that provide more details about the topics that we have discussed in this
a
s
(
lesson:
e
H
rahTopic
a
See
S
370
Pay entity override
PeopleSoft Enterprise Absence Management 9.1 PeopleBook, "Setting Up

Overrides," Defining Pay Entity Overrides
Pay group overrides

Overrides," Defining Pay Group Overrides
Payee level overrides

Overrides," Defining Payee Overrides
Pay calendar overrides

Creating Single Calendars
Element definition overrides

Overrides," Defining Element Definition Overrides
Override element hierarchy

Overrides," Understanding Overrides
Lesson 16

Objectives
Describe methods for adjusting frequency-based entitlement.
Override the definition of a frequency-based entitlement.
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
Slide 222
to
li
e
l
b
Adjust a payee's frequency-based entitlement balance.
ra
Sa
e
ens
(s
e
H
371
Lesson 16
Describing Methods for Adjusting Frequency-Based Entitlement
Two Types of Adjustments

There are two ways to adjust a payee's frequency-based entitlement:
Make a one-time adjustment to a payee's entitlement balance.
Override the definition of an entitlement element for a payee.
Slide 223
Student Notes
e
ens
Adjusting Absence-Based Entitlement

Adjustments to absence-based entitlement are covered in lesson 12.
tr
n
no
a
s uide
Entering and Processing Absences, Entering Absencea
Events
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
u
ah
r
a
(s
e
H
h
a
r
fe
s
n
a
See Also
Sa
372
ra
li
e
l
b
to
Lesson 16
Adjusting a Payee's Frequency-Based Entitlement Balance
Making One-Time Adjustments

Adjusting balances:
e
ens
to
Slide 224
Student Notes
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
Page Used to Adjust Absence Balances
s uide
a
h
Use this page to adjust a payee's balance for a frequency-based
a) nt G entitlement:
c
rio tude
a
t
Page Name
Navigation
n is S
o
h
tPayroll
e@ Global
h
e
Adjust Balances - Absences

& Absence Mgmt, Payee Data, Adjust Balances, Absences, Absences
s
h
u
a
r
(sa
e
H
h
a
r
Sa
Balance Adjustment
You can enter positive and negative values in the Balance Adjustment field.
Note. To adjust an entitlement balance for a payee, the Positive Input override option must be selected on the
entitlement element's name page.
373
Lesson 16
Overriding the Definition of a Frequency-Based Entitlement
Setting Up Override Instructions

Override the definition of a frequency-based entitlement element for a payee on the Assign Entitlements and
Takes page. You can:
Override the supporting element used to calculate the entitlement units.
Override the frequency for granting entitlement.
Override generation control for resolving entitlement.
Specify override begin and end dates.
e
ens
Prevent entitlement from being resolved.
li
e
l
b
ra
Slide 225
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
Page Used to Enter Override Instructions a)
tG
c
n
e
o
Use this page to override a frequency-based
d for a payee:
u
ari entitlement
t
t
n
o his S
@
t
e Navigation
Page Name
h
e
s
u
ah
r
a
Assign Entitlements
Payroll & Absence Mgmt, Payee Data, Maintain Absences, Assign
(s and Takes Global
e
Entitlements and Takes, Assign Entitlements and Takes
H
h
a
r
Sa
Student Notes
Note. To override an entitlement element, the Payee override option must be selected on the entitlement
element's name page.
Preventing Resolution of a Take Element

To prevent the resolution of a take element for a given payee, clear the Active field on the Assign
Entitlements and Takes page and enter the date range.
374
to
Lesson 16
Activity 15: Adjusting Frequency-Based Entitlement


1. Create a frequency-based entitlement element.
2. Create a day formula that recognizes partial hours.
3. Update an element group and section.
4. Modify the PTO take element.
5. Adjust a payee's entitlement balance.
6. Enter override instructions for entitlement.
7. Enter an absence event.
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
Slide 226
to
8. Run the absence process and review the results.
ra
Sa
e
ens
(s
e
H
375
Lesson 16
Activity Overview
The compensation committee has decided to reward all employees who worked on a major project that was
completed in December 2009, with an additional 12 days of compensated time. Management's intent is that
payees use compensated time first, floating holidays second, and PTO last. In addition, management has
decided that employees are now permitted to take absences of less than a full day.
Note. In this activity, use the employee IDs specified for your payroll system in the table at end of this
activity overview.
In this activity, you will:
Define a new entitlement element called Comp Ent:
Select the appropriate override check boxes.
Payees accrue 1 day per month.
e
ens
to
The effective date is January 1, 2010.
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
Select the appropriate accumulators.
tr
n
no
a
sand element
Add the entitlement element to the appropriate section
degroup:
a
i
h
u
a) nt G
The entitlement section is: Ent Sect. oc
ri tude
a
t
n is S
The element group is: Ent o
Grp.
th partial day absences and to use entitlement in this order:
e@ stoerecognize
Modify the PTO take
element
h
compensatedrtime,
ah floating uholidays, and PTO.
a
(s
Give
an extra 5 days of comp time to an employee.
e
hH
Create a day formula that calculates the number of partial hours a payee is absent.
ra Increase a payee's standard amount of PTO entitlement from 20 to 30 days.
Sa
Enter an absence event for PTO take for 3 hours each day from January 11 to January 22.
Run the absence process and compare your results to those at the end of the activity.
Employee ID Values for this Activity
Use the following table to determine the appropriate employee IDs to use for the tasks in this activity, based
on the payroll system used in the class:
Payroll System
Adjusting Entitlement
Overriding Entitlement
Entering an Absence
Payroll for North

America
KUL601 (Reggie)
KUL701 (Jill)
KUL701 (Jill)
Payroll Interface
K0LA01 (Ted)
K0LB02 (Bailey)
K0LB02 (Bailey)
376
Lesson 16
Creating a Frequency-Based Entitlement Element

To create a frequency-based entitlement element for compensated time:
2. Click Add a New Value.
3. Enter the following information on the Absence Entitlement Name page:
Value or Status
Name
Comp Ent
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
Override Levels - Payee
Selected
a
s uide
a
h
Override Levels - Positive Input
G
a) ntSelected
c
e
o
d information:
ri the following
u
aenter
t
t
4. Access the Calculation page and
n
o his S
@
e se t
Page Element hh
Value or Status
u
a
r
(saDate
Effective
January 1, 2010
e
H
h
ra
Sa
Page Element
e
ens
Description
Comp time
Entitlement Unit
Selected
Frequency ID
5. Access the Auto Generated Accumulators page

6. Click the Accumulator Periods link.
377
Lesson 16
7. On the Accumulator Periods page, enter the following information in the Auto Generated Accumulators
region of the page:
Page Element
Value or Status
Entitlement
Selected
Adjustment
Selected
Paid Units
Selected
8. Click OK.
9. On the Auto Generated Accumulators page, click Save.
Creating a Day Formula
e
ens
to
To define a formula to calculate partial hours:
ra
li
e
l
b
fe
s
n
a
Formulas.
tr
n
no
a
s page:uide
a
3. Enter the following information on the Formulah
Name
a) nt G
c
rio tude Value or Status

Page Element
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
Name
Partial Days
h
h
u
ra
a
Description
Partial Day Count Formula
s
(
e
h HAlways Recalculate
Selected
ra
Sa
4. On the Field-by-Field Definition page, enter an effective date of January 1, 2010.

5. Click Save.
378
Lesson 16
6. Enter the following information in the Field-by-Field Area group box:

Page Element
Value or Status
Function
If
Entry Type 1
System Element
Element 1
SCHED HRS
Operator
>
Entry Type 2
Numeric
Numeric Value 2
ra
fe
s
9. Add a new row and enter the following information for Sequence Number
3:
n
tra
n
noroStatus
Page Element
Value
a
s uide
a
h
Function
a) ntIf G
c
rio tude System Element

a
t
Entry Type 1
n is S
o
e@ se th
Element 1
PARTIAL HOURS
h
h
u
a
ar
s
Operator
=
(
e
hH
ra
Sa
Entry Type 2
Numeric
Numeric Value 2
to
li
e
l
b
7. Click the Add a New Row button in the Field-by-Field Area group box.
8. For Sequence Number 2, select the value Then in the Function field.
e
ens
10. Add a new row and enter the following information for Sequence Number 4:
Page Element
Value or Status
Function
Then
Entry Type 2
Numeric
Numeric Value 2
Assign to Type
Formula
Assign to Element
PARTIAL DAYS
379
Lesson 16
11. Add a new row and enter the following information for Sequence Number 5:
Page Element
Value or Status
Function
Else
Entry Type 1
System Element
Element 1
PARTIAL HOURS
Operator
Entry Type 2
System Element
Element 2
SCHED HRS
Assign to Type
Formula
Assign to Element
PARTIAL DAYS
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no Number
13. Add a new row and enter the following information fora
Sequence
7:
e
s
d
ha Gui
)
a
Page Element
c dentValue or Status
o
i
r
Function
Else
nta is Stu
o
e@ se th
Entry Type 2 hh
Numeric
u
a
r
(saValue 2
Numeric
0
e
H
h
12. Add a new row and for Sequence Number 6, select the function Endif.
ra
Sa
Assign to Type
Formula
Assign to Element
PARTIAL DAYS
14. Add a new row and for Sequence Number 8, select the function Endif.
15. Validate the formula by clicking the Validate button on the Field-by-Field Definition page.
16. Click Save.
17. Access the Text Definition page and compare your results to the following example.
380
e
ens
to
Lesson 16
Creating a Day Formula Results
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
Updating an Element Group and Section
a
s uide
a
h
To add the entitlement element to the element group:
a) nt G
c
e & Absence Mgmt, Framework, Organizational,

dPayroll
rio Global
u
a
t
t
Element Groups.
n is S
o
e@ se onththe Element Groups Search page:
2. Enter the following
information
h
u
ah
r
a
s
(Element
Page
Value or Status
e
H
rah Element Name
Ent Grp
a
S
Correct History
Selected

5. Insert a new row in the Element Group Members grid.
Page Element
Value or Status
Element Type
Abs Entitl
Element Name
Comp Ent
381
Lesson 16
7. Click Save.
Adding the Entitlement Element to a Section
To add the entitlement element to the appropriate section:

Sections.
2. Enter the following information on the Sections Search page:
Page Element
Value or Status
Element Name
Ent Sect
Correct History
Selected
e
ens
to
4. Access the Definition page.
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
5. Insert a new row in the Section Element List grid.
tr
n
no
a
e
s ValueuoridStatus
a
Page Element
h
a) nt G
c
Seq Nbr
rio tude 30
a
t
n is S
o
Element Type
Abs Entitl
e@ se th
h
u
ah
r
Element
Name
Comp Ent
a
(s
e
h7. HClick Save.
ra
Sa
Modifying the PTO Take Element

To modify the PTO Take element:
Absence Takes.
2. Enter the following information on the Absence Takes Search page:
Page Element
Value or Status
Element Name
PTO Take
Correct History
Selected
3. Click Search.
382
Lesson 16
5. On the Calculation page, add the Entitlement ElementComp Ent to the Entitlement Member List.
6. Set the priority of the entitlement elements as follows:
10 Comp Ent
20 Float Ent
30 PTO Ent
7. Access the Day Formula page and change the Day Formula Element field to Partial Days.
8. Click Save.
9. Click OK when you receive the warning about units.
to
e
s
An employee has been awarded an additional five days of compensated time for his extra contribution
en to the
c
i
l
project.
le
b
a
To adjust the entitlement balance:
er
f
s
n
aAbsences.
r
t
1. Select Global Payroll & Absence Mgmt, Payee Data, Adjust Balances,
on
n
2. Enter the following information on the Adjust Balancesa- Absencessearch page:
s uide
a
h
G or Status
a) ntValue
c
Page Element
e
o
ri tud
a
t
n
Empl ID
o his S
@
t
(Choose the valuefor
your Payroll
OR
hethis fieldsbased
e onin the
system. Use a
thehinformationuspecified
table of
K0LA01 {Ted} (for PI)
arin the Activity Overview.)
field values
s
(
e
H
Pay Grp
rah Pay Group
Adjusting a Payee's Entitlement Balance
Sa
Calendar ID
CAL ABSM01

4. Enter the following information on the Adjust Balances - Absences page:
Page Element
Value or Status
Element Name
Comp Ent
Balance Adjustment
5. Click Save.
Entering Override Instructions for Entitlement

Another employee has negotiated 30 days of PTO per year instead of the standard 20 days.
383
Lesson 16
To enter instructions for overriding the PTO entitlement:

1. Select Global Payroll & Absence Mgmt, Payee Data, Maintain Absences, Assign Entitlements and Takes.
2. Enter the following information on the Absence Entitlements and Takes page:
Page Element
Value or Status
Empl ID
KUL701 {Jill} (for PNA)

OR
Element Type
Absence Entitlement
Element Name
PTO Ent
Begin Date
January 1, 2010
K0LB02 {Bailey} (for PI)
3. Click the Unit Element tab and enter the following information:
e
ens
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s Numeric
de
Unit Element Type
a
i
h
u
a) nt G
c
Entitlement Unit
rio tude 30
a
t
n is S
o
4. Click Save.
e@ se th
h
u
ah
r
a
(s
Entering aneAbsence
Event
H
rahTo enter an absence event:
a
S 1. Select Global Payroll & Absence Mgmt, Payee Data, Maintain Absences, Absence Event.
Page Element
Value or Status
2. Search for the following information:

Page Element
Value or Status
Empl ID
KUL701 {Jill} (for PNA)

OR
K0LB02 {Bailey} (for PI)
3. On the Absence Event Entry page, enter a From date of January 1, 2010 and click the Refresh button.
384
to
Lesson 16
4. Enter the following information in the Absence Events grid and :

Page Element
Value or Status
Absence Take Element
PTO Take
Begin Date
January 11, 2010
End Date
January 22, 2010
Partial Hours
5. Click the Details link.

6. On the Absence Event Input Detail page, in the Partial Days field, select All Days.
7. Click OK.
e
ens
to
8. Click Save.
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
1. Select Global Payroll & Absence Mgmt, Absence
and
Payroll Processing, Calculate Absence and Payroll.
)
G
a
t
c
n
e
o
2. Enter the Run Control IDAbsence. ri
a Stud
t
n
o all hother
3. Enter the following data
(leave
is fields blank):
@
t
e
h use
h
a
Page Element
Value or Status
ar
s
(
e Group ID
H
Calendar
Jan 2010 GRP
h
ra
Sa
Calculate
Selected
4. Click the Run button.

7. Click the Refresh button periodically until the status of the process changes to Success.
Reviewing the Results

To review the results:
2. Compare the results for the two employees to the screen shots in the Results section.
385
Lesson 16
3. Answer the following questions:

Question
Answer
Which accumulators show the adjustment results?

Why does the day count (for the second employee)
show .380 instead of 1?
Why does the first employee receive 1.66 units of PTO
entitlement while the second employee receives 2.5
units?
Results for Employee ID KUL601 or K0LA01

Absence Data
ra
Sa
Positive Input
The Positive Input - Absence page should look like this:
386
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
(s
e
H
e
ens
to
Lesson 16
Accumulators
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
(s
e
H
Results for Employee ID KUL701 or K0LB02

Absence Data
387
Lesson 16
e
ens
ra
li
e
l
b
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
(s
e
H
Accumulators
388
to
Lesson 16
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
ncontinue.
This concludes the activity. Please do not
o
sS
i
@
h
t
he use
h
ra
a
s
e(
H
rah
a
S
389
Lesson 16
Review

You can adjust a payee's frequency-based entitlement balance by entering a one-time adjustment or
overriding the entitlement rule for a payee.
You use the Absence Adjustment page to adjust a payees' frequency-based entitlement balance for a single
calendar period.
You use the Entitlement/Take Assignment page to redefine a frequency-based entitlement rule for an
individual payee for the period of time you specify.
Slide 227
e
ens
li
e
l
b
Student Notes
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
This table lists additional resources that provide more details about
no the topics that we have discussed in this
a
lesson:
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
Topic
See
rio tude
a
t
nPeopleSoft
S
o
Adjustments and overrides
Enterprise
Absence Management 9.1 PeopleBook, "Entering
s
i
@
h
t
options
Absences," Adjusting and Overriding Entitlement Balances
e
h use
h
a
ar
s
(
e
H
rah
Sa
390
to
Lesson 17
Generating Positive Input for Payroll

Objectives
Describe positive input generation.
Map earning and deduction elements to a payroll system.
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
Slide 229
ra
Sa
to
li
e
l
b
Create earning and deduction elements.
Associate earning and deduction elements with take elements.
e
ens
(s
e
H
391
Lesson 17
Describing Positive Input Generation
The Role of Positive Input

Take processing converts absence events into generated positive inputunits of paid and unpaid timethat
your payroll system can process.
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
Slide 230
tr
n
no
Student Notes
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
What is Positive Input?

rio tude
a
t
nprocessisgenerates
S for absence-related earnings and deductions. It consists
Positive input is data that the Take
o
@
of the units of paid and unpaid
time
the
system
calculates for employees. It can also include other values that
h
t
e application,
h
e
you can pass to your

payroll
such
as
a pay rate or percent to be used in an earning or deduction
s
h application
u
a
r
calculation. Your
payroll
can
use
this
data to properly compensate employees for time off.
a
s
(
e
H
rah Integration
Payroll
a
S
Absence Management integrates with these payroll applications:
PeopleSoft Enterprise Payroll for North America, either directly or through PeopleSoft Enterprise Time and
Labor.
Third-party payroll systems through PeopleSoft Enterprise Payroll Interface.
392
Lesson 17
Describing Positive Input Generation (continued)
The Role of Earnings and Deductions

To generate positive input for absences, the system must know which earnings and deductions are associated
with each take element.
Take elements are mapped to payroll earnings and deduction codes through the use of earning and deduction
elements defined in Absence Management:
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
Slide 231
(s
e
H
rah
a
SStudent Notes
Using Earning Elements with Payroll for North America
If you're using Payroll for North America with Absence Management, create earning elements only; do not
create deduction elements. You can map earning elements to earning codes; you cannot map to payroll
deduction codes.
To generate positive input for paid and unpaid units, create separate earning elements for paid and unpaid
time.
393
Lesson 17
Describing Positive Input Generation (continued)
Setup Steps for Generating Positive Input

To generate positive input for earnings and deductions:
Slide 232
Student Notes
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
394
(s
e
H
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
Setup Sequence
Steps 2 and 3 can be reversed.
e
ens
to
Lesson 17
Creating Earning and Deduction Elements
Defining Earnings and Deductions

Create earning elements and deduction elements to correspond to the earning and deduction codes in your
payroll application.
Slide 233
Student Notes
to
e
ens
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
Components Used to Define Earning and Deduction
s Elements
de
a
i
h
u
Use these components to define earning and deduction
a) elements:
tG
c
n
e
o
udearning elements.
ari toSdefine
Earnings component (GP_EARNINGS)
t
t
n
o his
@
t
Deductions componente(GP_DEDUCTION)
to define deduction elements.
h
e
s
h
u
ra
a
Note. Each
component
of multiple pages. Absence Management uses information entered on the
s
( Name pages andconsists
e
Element
Calculation pages only.
H
h
a
r
Sa
395
Lesson 17
Creating Earning and Deduction Elements (continued)
Naming the Element

Use the Element Name page to:
Define the element's name.
Enable an override level of positive input.
Slide 234
Student Notes
e
ens
Pages Used to Name an Earning Element

Use this page to name an earning element:
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
fe
s
n
a
ra
Sa
396
(s
e
H
ra
li
e
l
b
to
Lesson 17
Page Name
Navigation
Earnings Name
Set Up HRMS, Product Related, Global Payroll & Absence Mgmt, Elements, Payroll
Elements, Earnings, Earnings Name
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
nPage is S
o
Completing the Earnings Name
e@ se th
h
You must selecta

the
hPositive Input
u check box to associate the earning element with a take element.
r
a
(sParameters and Results fields do not apply to Absence Management. These fields are applicable to
Resolution
e
H Enterprise Global Payroll only.
PeopleSoft
h
a
r
Sa
397
Lesson 17
Defining the Element's Calculation Rule

When you define an element's calculation rule, you can:
Select a calculation rule that includes units, such as Unit x Rate.
Select Payee Level for each component of the calculation rule.
Slide 235
Student Notes
e
ens
Pages Used to Define the Calculation Rule

Use this page to define the calculation rule for an earning element:
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
fe
s
n
a
ra
Sa
398
(s
e
H
ra
li
e
l
b
to
Lesson 17
Page Name
Navigation
Earnings - Calculation
Set Up HRMS, Product Related, Global Payroll & Absence Mgmt, Elements, Payroll
Elements, Earnings, Calculation
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
Completing the Calculation Page
o
th that are used only by Global Payroll. For Absence Management,
e@ many
h
e
The Calculation page
includes
fields
s
aanh effectiveudate, select the calculation rule, and select Payee Level for the component
you need to enter
r
a
(sother fields on this page do not apply.
types. The
e
H
h
a
ar
SSelecting
a Calculation Rule
Because take processing generates positive input for units, you'll want to select one of the two calculation
rules that includes units:
Unit x Rate
Unit x Rate x Percent
Note. If you're using Payroll Interface, you can also use a calculation rule of Amount or Base x Percent.
Selecting Calculation Components

The parts of a calculation ruleunits and rate, for example-are referred to as components. For each
component of your rule, select Payee Level in the type field.
Later on, when you link the earning or deduction element to a take element, you'll select the elements that are
to return the values of the components during take processing.
399
Lesson 17
Changing a Calculation Rule

After you define a calculation rule, you cannot change it, unless all of these conditions are met:
No positive input has been generated for the element.
No output results use the element.
The element has only one effective-dated row.
Slide 236
Student Notes
Revising a Calculation Rule
e
ens
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
li
e
l
b
If you need to change a calculation rule and are unable to do so because it does not meet all of the listed
conditions, create a new element. This restriction primarily exists because of retroactive considerations.
ra
Sa
400
(s
e
H
to
Lesson 17
Viewing and Updating Automatically Generated Components

The system automatically creates an element for each component of an earning or deduction element's
calculation rule.
You can modify the component element's:
Description
Comments
Custom fields
to
All other fields are updated whenever the parent element's value changes.
Slide 237
e
ens
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
Page Used to View and Update ComponentaElement
Information
)
G
t
c
n
e
o
d generated when you save the definition of a new
Use this page to view components that
rarei automatically
u
a
t
t
n
earning or deduction element: o
sS
i
@
h
t
he use
h
ra
a
s
e(
H
rah
a
S
Student Notes
401
Lesson 17
Page Name
Navigation
Components
Supporting Elements, Components, Components
e
ens
ra
li
e
l
b
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
402
(s
e
H
to
Lesson 17
Viewing Component Suffixes

The system uses the following naming convention to name the components of a calculation rule:
Slide 238
e
ens
to
Student Notes
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
Use this page to view suffixes for earnings and deductions:a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
u
ah
r
a
(s
e
hH
Page Used to View Element Suffixes
ra
Sa
403
Lesson 17
Page Name
Navigation
Earnings and Deductions
Set Up HRMS, Product Related, Global Payroll & Absence Mgmt, System Settings,
Element Suffixes, Earnings and Deductions
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n Suffixes
o
sS
How the System Assigns Element
i
@
h
t
e se
hsuffix
The system appends

a
to
h
uthe name of each component of an earning or deduction element's calculation
a
r
a
rule.
(s
e
H are defined by country. To assign a suffix, the system looks for the country indicated on the suffix
Suffixes
h
a
r
Sa pages and tries to match it to the country defined on the Element Name page (in the Used By/Country fields).
If no match is found or if the element is defined for use Across Countries (in the Used By/Country field), and
the Default Suffix Set check box is selected on the Earnings and Deduction page, the system uses the suffixes
defined for the default country.
404
Lesson 17
Mapping Earnings and Deductions to a Payroll System
Mapping Elements to Payroll Codes

After you define earning and deduction elements, map them to earning and deduction codes in your payroll
system.
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
Slide 239
no
a
s uide
a
h
Student Notes
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
Direct Mapping Versus IndirectoMapping
th
eor@Payroll
h
If using Payroll Interface,
for North America without Time and Labor, you use a page in the
e
s
u to map directly to earning and deduction codes in your payroll application.
ah application
Absence Management
r
a
(sPayroll for North America with Time and Labor, you use two pages in Time and Labor to map
e
If you
use
H
h
elements to time reporting codes (TRCs) and payroll earning and deduction codes. We refer to this as indirect
a
r
Sa mapping.
405
Lesson 17
Mapping Earnings and Deductions to a Payroll System (continued)
Direct Mapping to Payroll Interface or Payroll for North America

To map earning and deduction elements directly:
1. Select the payroll application.
2. Map each earning or deduction element to its counterpart in the payroll application:
With Payroll for North America, you can only map to earning codes.
Slide 240
Student Notes
Page Used to Map Earning and Deduction Elements Directly
e
ens
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
)
tG
Page Name
Navigation ca
n
e
o
ri tud
a
t
n
Earnings/Deduction Mapping o
Set Up HRMS,S
Global Payroll & Absence Mgmt, Integration,
s Product Related,
i
Absence
Earns/Deductn
Mapping
@
h
t
he uSelect
e the payroll system.
s
h
a
ar
s
(
e
H
h
Use this page to map Absence Management earning and deduction elements to codes in Payroll for North
America:
ra
Sa
Note. The payroll application that you select when accessing this page determines which fields appear.
406
to
Lesson 17
Example: Earning and Deduction Mapping for Payroll Interface
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
(s
e
H
407
Lesson 17
Mapping Earnings and Deductions to a Payroll System (continued)
Indirect Mapping to Payroll for North America with Time and Labor
To map earning elements indirectly in Time and Labor:
1. Access the Time Reporting Codes - Definition page for the time reporting code.
2. Select the Map to Absence Management check box.
3. In the Map to Earning Codes group box, complete the following fields:
Payroll System
Earnings Code (for Absence Management)
to
Earnings Code (for PNA)

Slide 241
e
ens
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
Student Notes
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) Elements
t G Indirectly
Example: Mapping to Earning and Deduction
c
n
e
o
delement, K0PHOL ALL, is mapped to the time reporting
u
ari earning
t
t
In this example, the Absence Management
n
S earning code PTO.
o for North
sAmerica
i
code, K0PTO, and to the Payroll
@
h
t
he use
h
ra
a
s
e(
H
rah
a
S
408
Lesson 17
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
e
ud- Definition
ario S
t
t
Note. The navigation to the TimenReporting
Codes
page is Set Up HRMS, Product Related, Time
o
s
and Labor, Time Reporting,
@Time Reporting
hi Codes - TRC.
t
e
h
e
s
h
u
a
r
(sa
e
hH
ra
Sa
409
Lesson 17
Associating Earning and Deduction Elements with Take Elements
Linking Earning and Deduction Elements to Take Elements

This diagram shows the last setup step for generating positive input:
e
ens
ra
li
e
l
b
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
Slide 242
no
a
s uide
a
h
Student Notes
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n andisDeductions
S
o
Page Used to Associate Earnings
with Take Elements
@
h
t
e
eand deduction elements with a take element:
h earning
Use this page to associate
s
h
u
a
ar
s
(
e
H
rah
a
S
410
to
Lesson 17
Page Name
Navigation
Day Formula
Absence Elements, Absence Takes, Day Formula
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n Input
S
o
sMember
Completing the Generate Positive
List
i
@
h
t
e
h
e
s
h
Use the grid to select:
u
a
r
(saand deduction elements to associate with the take element.
Thee
earning
H
h
a
The
supporting element that returns the unit value for each earning or deduction.
r
Sa
(Optional) The supporting element that returns the value for other components of an earning or deduction
element's calculation rule.
Select supporting elements for rate, percent, or amount only if you want the system to pass these values to
the payroll application for use in calculating the earning or deduction during payroll processing.
Note. Depending on the calculation rule, you can pass rate values to Payroll for North America; you can
pass rate, percent, and amount values to Payroll Interface.
411
Lesson 17
Associating Earning and Deduction Elements with Take Elements

(continued)
Using Rate Codes as Components of a Calculation Rule
You can use rate code elements as components of an earning or deduction element's calculation rule.
Here are some common characteristics of rate codes:
Defined in Human Resources.
Rate code elements in Absence Management are mapped to rate codes in Human Resources.
e
ens
to
Each rate code element in Absence Management is associated with only one Human Resources rate code.
li
e
l
b
When generating positive input in Absence Management, the system retrieves the value of the rate code
from Human Resources.
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
Student Notes
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
Pages Used to View and Define RaterCodes

io tude
a
t
n is S
o
Use these pages to define rate codes.
e@ se th
h
Use this page to

u a rate code element to an existing rate code in Human Resources:
ahview and map
r
a
(s
e
Page Name
Navigation
H
h
a
r
Sa
Rate Codes - Definition
Slide 243
Supporting Elements, Rate Codes, Definition
Use this page to create a rate code in PeopleSoft Enterprise Human Resources.
Page Name
Navigation
Comp Rate Code Table
Set Up HRMS, Foundation Tables, Compensation Rules, Comp Rate Code Table,
Comp Rate Code Table
Note. Absence Management does not use rate codes in any calculations. If you use a rate code element as a
component of an earning or deduction element's calculation rule, the system will pass the rate on to your
payroll system when you transmit absence data. This rate will overwrite the rate that's associated with your
payroll application's earning or deduction code.
412
Lesson 17
Activity 16: Generating Positive Input

In this activity you will review the activity overview and:

1. Define an earning element for paid PTO take.
2. Define a formula for converting paid days into hours.
3. Associate the earning element with the take element.
4. Map the earning element to a payroll earning code.
5. Run the absence process.
6. View processing results.
7. Finalize the absence process.
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
Slide 244
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
(s
e
H
413
Lesson 17
Activity Overview
In this activity you will:
Create an earning element, called PTO Pd Hrs that has a calculation rule of Unit x Rate and an effective
date of January 1, 2010.
Create a formula, called Pd Days to Hours that can convert paid days into paid hours.
Associate the earning element with the PTO Take element and select the formula that you created for the
unit component.
Map the PTO Pd Hrs earning element to the payroll earning code 043.
Rerun the absence process, and view the results.
e
ens
Finalize the January calendar group after you confirm that your results match those shown in the Results
section.
to
ic
l
e
Use the following table to determine the appropriate employee IDs to use when reviewing
bl the absence event:
a
r
fe
s
n
Payroll System
Employee ID
tra
n
o
n(Reggie)
KUL601
a
e
s
d
a
i
h K0LA01
u(Ted)
)
Payroll Interface
G
a
t
c den
o
i
r
tu
ntapassword
S
Note. Use PS for the user nameoand
in this activity.
s
@ thi
e
h
e
s
h
u
a
ar
s
(
e
H
rah
Sa
414
Lesson 17
Defining an Earning Element for Paid PTO

To define an earning element for PTO paid hours:
1. Select Set Up HRMS, Product Related, Global Payroll & Absence Mgmt, Elements, Payroll Elements,
Earnings.
3. Enter the following information on the Earnings Name page:
Value or Status
Name
PTO Pd Hrs
Unit Type
Payee Level
Rate Type
Payee Level
to
li
e
l
b
ra
sfe
Description
PTO Paid Hoursan
tr
n
no
Override Levels - Positive Input
Selected
a
s uide
a
h
4. Enter the following information on the Calculation
a) page:
tG
c
n
e
o
ri tud
a
t
n
Page Element
Value or Status
o his S
@
t
e se
Effective Date hh
January 1, 2010
u
a
r
(sa Rule
Calculation
Unit x Rate
e
H
h
ra
Sa
Page Element
e
ens
5. Click Save.
Defining a Formula for Determining Paid Hours

To create a formula to convert paid days to hours:
Formulas.
2. Click Add a New Value.
415
Lesson 17
3. Enter the following information on the Formula Name page:

Page Element
Value or Status
Name
Pd Days to Hours
Description
Days to Hours
Always Recalculate
Selected
4. Access the Field-by-Field Definition page and enter an effective date of January 1, 2010.
5. Click Save.
6. Enter the following information in the Field-by-Field Area:
Page Element
Value or Status
Entry Type 1
System Element
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
o
Operator
*a n
e
s
d
a
i
h System
uElement
)
Entry Type 2
G
a
t
c den
o
i
r
Element 2
DAY COUNT PD
nta is Stu
o
@ th
Assign to Type he
Formula
e
s
h
u
a
ar
s
Assign
to Element
Pd Days to Hours
(
e
hH
Element 1
ra 7.
Sa
e
ens
SCHED HRS
Click the Validate button to validate the formula.
8. Click Save.
Modifying the Take Element

To modify the PTO Take element:
Absence Takes.
2. On the Absence Takes search page enter the following information:
416
Page Element
Value or Status
Element Name
PTO Take
Correct History
Selected
Lesson 17

4. Access the Day Formula page.
5. Enter the following information in the Generate Positive Input Member List:
Page Element
Value or Status
Order
10
Element Type
Earnings
Element
PTO PD HRS
Unit Element Type
Formula
Unit Element
Pd Days to Hours
6. Click Save.
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
To map PTO PD HRS to the corresponding earning code that
is used by the payroll application:
a
s uide
a
h
1. Select Set Up HRMS, Product Related, Global
&G
Absence Mgmt, Integration, Absence
a) Payroll
t
c
n
Earns/Deductn Mapping.
rio tude
a
t
n or Payroll
2. Select Payroll for North America
o
is S Interface as the payroll system, as advised by your instructor,
h
and click Search. e@
t
h use
h
a
3. In the Mapping
ar group box, click the Add a New Row button.
s
(
e an Effective Date of January 1, 2010.
4. H
Enter
h
Mapping the Earning Element to a Payroll Earning Code
ra 5.
Sa
e
ens
Add a row to the Earnings grid.
6. Enter the following information in the new row:

Page Element
Value or Status
Element Name
PTO PD Hrs
NA Earnings Code (for PNA)
043
OR
Payroll Interface Code (for PI)
7. Click Save.
Running the Absence Process and Reviewing the Results

417
Lesson 17
2. Enter the Absence Run Control ID you created earlier.
3. Enter the following information on the Calculate Absence and Payroll page:
Page Element
Value or Status
Calendar Group ID
JAN 2010 GRP
Calculate
Selected
Recalculate All
Selected
4. Click the Run button.
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
Reviewing Processing Results
no
a
s uide
a
h
)
G
a
tPayroll
c
n
1. Select Global Payroll & Absence Mgmt,

Absence
and
Processing, Review Absence/Payroll Info,
e
o
i tud
Results by Calendar Group. tar
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
u
ah
r
a
s
Page(Element
Value or Status
e
H
h
Empl ID
a
r
Sa
OR
K0LA01 {Ted} (For PI)
Calendar Group ID
JAN 2010 GRP.
3. Compare your results to the screen shots in the Results section.

Note. To access the Positive Input Details page, click the Other Data link on the Generated Positive Input
page.
Results for Employee ID KUL601 or K0LA01

Absence Data
418
Lesson 17
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
Generated Positive Input

The Generated Positive Input page should look like this:
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
(s
e
H
Positive Input Details

The Positive Input Details page should look like this:
419
Lesson 17
e
ens
Results for Employee ID KUL701 or K0LB02
tr
n
Absence Data
no
a
s uide
The Absence Data page should look like this: ) ha
a nt G
c
o
ri tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
u
ah
r
a
(s
e
hH
ra
Sa
420
fe
s
n
a
ra
li
e
l
b
to
Lesson 17
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
e@ se th
h
h
u
ara
ra
Sa
(s
e
H
Generated Positive Input

The Generated Positive Input page should look like this:
421
Lesson 17
e
ens
ra
li
e
l
b
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
Positive Input Detailse@
th
h
e
s
ahDetails pageu should look like this:
The Positivea
Input
r
(s
e
hH
ra
Sa
Accumulators
422
to
Lesson 17
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uide
a
h
a) nt G
c
rio tude
a
t
n is S
o
Finalizing the Absence Process
e@ se th
h
To finalize the absence

u
ah process:
r
a
(sGlobal Payroll & Absence Mgmt, Absence and Payroll Processing, Calculate Absence and Payroll.
1. Select
e
H
h
a
2.
Enter Absence as the Run Control ID.
r
Sa 3. Enter the following information:
Page Element
Value or Status
Calendar Group ID
Jan 2010 Grp
Finalize
Selected
4. Click Run.
5. Click OK on the Process Scheduler Request page.
423
Lesson 17
Review

Take processing generates positive inputpaid and unpaid unitsfor earnings and deductions that you can
send to a payroll system for processing.
When defining an earning or a deduction element, select an override level of Positive Input and select
Payee Level for each component of the calculation rule.
You associate earning and deduction elements with earning and deduction codes used by your payroll
system.
You associate earning elements, deduction elements, or both with take elements.
e
ens
to
li
e
l
b
Slide 245
Student Notes
ra
fe
s
n
a
tr
n
no
a
s uidthee topics that we have discussed in this
a
This table lists additional resources that provide more
details about
h
a) nt G
lesson:
c
rio tude
a
t
nSee is S
Topic
o
e@ se th
h
Earning and deduction

Enterprise Absence Management 9.1 PeopleBook,"Defining Earning
ah setup in u PeopleSoft
r
Absence Management
and
Deduction
Elements"
a
(s
e
H
Component suffixes
PeopleSoft Enterprise Absence Management 9.1 PeopleBook,Defining General
h
a
r
Element Information," Defining Suffixes
Sa
424
Updating components
PeopleSoft Enterprise Absence Management 9.1 PeopleBook,Defining General

Element Information," Updating Component Element Information
Mapping to payroll codes
PeopleSoft Enterprise Absence Management 9.1 PeopleBook,Integrating Absence

Management and the Payroll System
Linking earnings and deductions

to takes
PeopleSoft Enterprise Absence Management 9.1 PeopleBook,Defining Absence

Elements," Defining Absence Take Elements
Rate codes
PeopleSoft Enterprise Absence Management 9.1 PeopleBook,Defining Data

Retrieval Elements," Defining Rate Code Elements

Absence Management Rel 9.1 - Volumn 1

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Absence Management Rel 9.1 - Volumn 1

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibited Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates

Copyright 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

ra Describing Holiday Schedules ........................................................................................................................ 41

Explaining Methods of Assigning Work Schedules ........................................................................................ 43

Describing the rProcessing

Viewing, Adding, and Canceling Segmentation Triggers ............................................................................. 648

By the end of this course, you will be able to:

Defining absence take elements.

Defining forecasting and balance inquiry processes.

Using Leave Donations

Business Process Overview

Integration with other applications.

Sources of information about Absenceio

Business Process Overview

Describing Absence Management Features

Business Process Overview

Describing Integration with Other Applications

Integration with Other PeopleSoft Products

ara Management Integration

Business Process Overview

Integration with Oracle Workforce Scheduling

Business Process Overview

Describing Absence Terminology

Generated positive input

Additional Absence Terms

Business Process Overview

The consecutive period of time that a payee is absent for

The units of paid time off that a payee is entitled to take

The number of units of unused entitlement.

An increase or decrease made to the entitlement balance.

The number of units of time off that a payee actually

The period of time in which entitlement, takes, balances,

u some of the absence terms are used:

Business Process Overview

Business Process Overview

Describing Elements (continued)

Defining Absence Rules with Elements

Here are some brief descriptions and simple

Business Process Overview

Describing the Organizational, Processing, and Calendar

Each type of framework serves a distinct purpose. An organizational

Purpose of the Frameworks

Business Process Overview

Describing the Organizational, Processing, and Calendar

A payee is anyone who is processed in Absence Management.

Business Process Overview

Business Process Overview

Describing the Organizational, Processing, and Calendar

Business Process Overview

Describing the Organizational, Processing, and Calendar

Business Process Overview

Describing Setup and Processing Steps

Setup and Ongoing Tasks

Overview of Setup Tasks

Business Process Overview

4. Define absence take elements.

Overview of Ongoing Tasks

Business Process Overview

Describing Setup and Processing Steps (continued)

Business Process Overview

Describing Sources of Information About Absence Management

Implementation and Business Process Information

Business Process Overview